MODULE COC 1 (ADCEPS) A PDF

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 314

COMPETENCY BASED

LEARNING MATERIAL

Sector:
ELECTRONICS
Qualification:
Consumer Electronics Servicing NC II
Unit of Competency:
Assemble and Disassemble Consumer Electronic Products and Systems
Module Title:
Assembling and Disassembling Consumer Electronic Products and System

TESDARizalProvincialTrainingCenter – Cainta
A. Bonifacio Avenue, Cainta Municipal Compound, Cainta, Rizal
HOW TO USE THIS COMPETENCY BASED LEARNING
MATERIAL

Welcome to the module inAssemblingand Disassembling Consumer


Electronic Products and Systems.This module contains training materials
and activities for you to complete.

The unit of competency "Assembleand Disassemble Consumer


Electronic Products and Systems" contains knowledge, skills and attitudes
required for aConsumer Electronics Servicingcourse. It is one of the
specialized modules at National Certificate II (NC II) level.

You are required to go through a series of learning activities in order to


complete each learning outcome of the module. In each learning outcome
are Information Sheets and Resources Sheets (Reference Materials for
further reading to help you better understand the required activities). Follow
these activities on your own and answer the self-check at the end of each
learning outcome. You may remove a blank answer sheet at the end of each
module (or get one from your facilitator/trainer) to write your answers for
each self-check. If you have questions, don’t hesitate to ask your facilitator
for assistance.

Recognition of Prior Learning (RPL)

You may already have some or most of the knowledge and skills covered
in this learner's guide because you have:
been working for some time
already completed training in this area.

If you can demonstrate to your trainer that you are competent in a


particular skill or skills, talk to him/her about having them formally
recognized so you don't have to do the same training again. If you have a
qualification or Certificate of Competency from previous trainings, show it to
your trainer. If the skills you acquired are still current and relevant to the
unit/s of competency they may become part of the evidence you can present
for RPL. If you are not sure about the currency of your skills, discuss this
with your trainer.

This module was prepared to help you achieve the required competency,
in Consumer Electronics Servicing NC II. This will be the source of
information for you to acquire knowledge and skills in this particular trade
independently and at your own pace, with minimum supervision or help
from your instructor.
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
 Talk to your trainer and agree on how you will both organize the Training
of this unit. Read through the module carefully. It is divided into
sections, which cover all the skills, and knowledge you need to
successfully complete this module.
 Work through all the information and complete the activities in each
section. Read information sheets and complete the self-check. Suggested
references are included to supplement the materials provided in this
module.
 Most probably your trainer will also be your supervisor or manager.
He/she is there to support you and show you the correct way to do
things.
 Your trainer will tell you about the important things you need to consider
when you are completing activities and it is important that you listen and
take notes.
 You will be given plenty of opportunity to ask questions and practice on
the job. Make sure you practice your new skills during regular work
shifts. This way you will improve both your speed and memory and also
your confidence.
 Talk to more experience workmates and ask for their guidance.
 Use the self-check questions at the end of each section to test your own
progress.
 When you are ready, ask your trainer to watch you perform the activities
outlined in this module.
 As you work through the activities, ask for written feedback on your
progress. Your trainer keeps feedback/ pre-assessment reports for this
reason. When you have successfully completed each element, ask your
trainer to mark on the reports that you are ready for assessment.
 When you have completed this module (or several modules), and feel
confident that you have had sufficient practice, your trainer will arrange
an appointment with registered assessor to assess you. The results of
your assessment will be recorded in your competency Achievement
Record.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
ELECTRONICS
INDUSTRY SECTOR

NATIONAL CERTIFICATE LEVEL II


QUALIFICATION LEVEL

COMPETENCY-BASED LEARNING MATERIALS

No Basic Competencies Module Title Code


.
Participate in workplace 1. Participating in workplace 500311105
1. communication communication
Work in a team 2. Working in a environment 500311106
2. environment
Practice career 3. Practicing career 500 311 1 07
3. professionalism professionalism
Practice occupational 4. Practicing occupational 500 311 1 08
4. health and safety health and safety
procedures procedure

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
No Common Competencies Module Title Code
.
Use hand tools 1. Using hand tools ELC 724 201
1.
Perform mensuration and 2. Performing mensuration ELC 311 201
2. calculation and calculation
Prepare and interpret 3. Preparing and interpreting ELC 311 202
3. technical drawings technical drawings
Apply quality standards 4. Applying quality ELC 315 202
4. standards
Perform computer 5. Performing computer ELC 311 203
5. operation operations
Terminate and connect 6. Terminating and ELC 724 202
6 electrical wiring and connecting electrical
electronics circuit wiring and electronics
circuit

NO CORE COMPETENCIES MODULE TITLE CODE


Assemble and Assembling and ELC724322
Disassemble Consumer Disassembling
1
Electronic Products and Consumer Electronic
Systems Products and Systems
Maintain and Repair Maintaining and ELC724323
2 Audio/Video Products Repairing Audio/Video
and Systems Products and Systems
Maintain and Repair Maintaining and ELC724324
Electronically Controlled Repairing Electronically
3
Domestic Appliances Controlled Domestic
Appliances
Maintain and Repair Maintaining and ELC724325
4
Cellular Phone Repairing Cellular Phone

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
MODULE CONTENT

UNIT OF COMPETENCY:Assemble and Disassemble Consumer


Electronic
Products and System

MODULE TITLE: Assembling and Disassembling Consumer


Electronic Products and System

MODULE DESCRIPTOR:

This module covers the knowledge; skills and attitude in performing


assemble and disassemble consumer electronic products and system. It
includes trainees’ requirements in performing assembling and disassembling
consumer electronic products and systems.
This module is designed to enhance the knowledge, skills and attitude
of the trainees in assembling and disassembling consumer electronic
products and systems.
This module covers the knowledge, skills and attitudes required to
assemble/ disassemble consumer electronic products and systems. It
includes trainees’ requirements in performingassembling and disassembling
consumer electronic products and systems assessment. It also include
proper application of OHS, tools, equipment and testing instruments;
interpretation of schematic diagrams and part list; proper soldering and de-
soldering, wiring, cabling, assembling and disassembling techniques and
performing systematic inspection and specific testing procedures.

NOMINAL DURATION: 40 Hours

LEARNING OUTCOMES:

At the end of this module you must be able to:

- Enumerate, explain and apply OHS policies and procedures in


assembling and disassembling consumer electronics products and
systems
- Identify and explain the uses/functions of different types of tools,
equipment and testing instruments
- Identify electronic symbols and interpret schematic diagrams and
parts list
- Apply proper soldering and de-soldering techniques
- Apply wiring and cabling techniques
- Apply assembling and disassembling techniques
- Perform systematic inspection and apply specific testing procedures

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
ASSESSMENT CRITERIA:

1. Communication skills to interpret work instructions are defined


and demonstrated according to the established procedures
2. Electrical safety precautions are identified, enumerated and
explained correctly
3. OHS in assembling and disassembling consumer products and
systems are defined and explained
4. OHS in assembling and disassembling consumer products and
systems are demonstrated in accordance to the set
procedures/instructionsOHS in assembling and disassembling
consumer products and systems are demonstrated in accordance
to the set procedures/instructions
5. Materials needed for assembly and disassembly are identified and
prepared and checked according to the work instructions
6. Tools and equipment types and functions needed for assembly and
disassembly are identified and demonstrated according to set
standards
7. Testing devices and instruments operations needed for assembly
and disassembly are explained and demonstrated according to
instruction manual
8. Personal protective equipment are used in accordance with the
OccupationalHealth and Safety guidelines and policies
9. Electronic symbols are identified and selected according to the
schematic diagram
10. Electronic parts value are read and matched correctly as required
11. Schematic diagram sections and functions are identified and
explained
12. Workplace is prepared in accordance with OH&S policies and
procedures
13. Required materials, tools and equipment are prepared and checked
in accordance with established procedures
14. Soldering and desoldering processes are performed in accordance
with OH&S policies and procedures
15. Responsible person is consulted for effective and proper work
coordination
16. Workplace is prepared in accordance with OH&S policies and
procedures
17. Required materials, tools and equipment are prepared and checked
in accordance with established procedures
18. Parts and materials needed to complete the work are prepared and
obtained according to requirements
19. Wiring and cabling processes are performed in accordance with
OH&S policies and procedures
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
20. Responsible person is consulted for effective and proper work
coordination
21. Assembly workplace is prepared in accordance with OH&S policies
and procedures
22. Responsible person is consulted for effective and proper work
coordination
23. Required materials, tools and equipment are prepared and checked
in accordance with established procedures
24. Parts and materials needed to complete the work are prepared and
obtained according to requirements
25. Assembling and disassembling processes are performed in
accordance with
26. OH&S policies and procedures
27. Process is checked according to established standards and
requirements
28. Assembled products are checked in accordance with quality
standards
29. Finished products are subjected to final visual inspection and
testing in accordance with quality standards, procedures and
requirements
30. Work completion is documented and responsible person is
informed in accordance with established procedures
31. Housekeeping procedures are observed in accordance with 5S
discipline and established procedures
Qualification Levels:
Trainees Qualifications:

- At leastHigh School Graduate


- 16 years of age
- With good moral character
- Has passed the aptitude test given by the Center
- Physically and mentally fit for training
- Has no criminal records

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
LEARNING OUTCOME SUMMARY

Learning Outcome #1 Enumerate, explain and apply OHS policies


and procedures in assembling and disassembling consumer
electronics products and systems.

CONTENTS:

Work safety requirements


Application of 5S
Handling and disposal of chemicals
Hazardous and risk assessment mechanisms
Isolation procedures
Use of protective equipment and clothing
Use of codes of practice
Philippine electrical/electronics code

CONDITIONS:

Students/trainees must be provided with the following:


Learning elements and manuals
Working area/bench
PPE

EQUIPMENT TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES

● OHP ● Anti-static wrist rap


● TV, LCD ● Hand Gloves
● Working Table ●Goggles

SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LEARNING MATERIALS

● Pentel Pens ● Handouts


● Eraser ● Paper-based assessment form.
● Paper Assessment record book.
● Alcohol Visual Aids
● White Board Related textbooks
White Board Marker CDs for related film show
CBLM

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
METHODOLOGIES:

● Demonstration
Research work
Role-playing

ASSESSMENT METHODS:
Return demonstration
Oral and written examinations / Paper and Pen Test
Direct Observation/ Interview
Practical examination

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Learning Experiences

Learning Outcome 1

DETERMINE LEARNER’S TRAINING REQUIREMENTS

Learning Activities Special Instructions


1. Read Information Sheet # 1.1-1
on Enumerate, explain and apply
OHS policies and procedures in
Assembling and Disassembling
Consumer Electronics Products and
Systems
2. Answer Self-Check #1.1-1 Compare answer with Answer Key
3. Perform Task Sheet #2.1-1 Evaluate Using Performance criteria
checklist
4. Read Information Sheet #1.1-1A
5. Answer Self-Check #1.1-1A Compare answer with Answer Key
6. Perform Task Sheet #1.1-1A Evaluate Using Performance criteria
checklist
7. Perform Job Sheet #2.1-1 Evaluate Using Performance criteria
checklist
8. Watch Video Clips This video clips will identify the
specific endangerments sites for the
trainee to apply safety and
precaution on these sites.
After doing all the activities of this
LO, you are ready to proceed to the
next LO on discuss the treatment
strategy with the client/patient.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Information Sheet # 1.1-1

LO1. ENUMERATE, EXPLAIN AND APPLY OHS POLICIES AND


PROCEDURES IN ASSEMBLING AND DISASSEMBLING CONSUMER
ELECTRONICS PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS.

Learning Objectives: In an electronics shop scenario, the trainee will be


able to enumerate, explain and apply the OHS policies and procedure in
assembling and disassembling consumer electronics products and systems
with-in 25 minutes.

What is 5S?
- These came from the Japanese system of workplace, wherein
everything should be organized and planned.
- This is also a way of showing self-discipline.
- Is the most basic and fundamental approach for improving
productivity in all types business and particularly at plants and factories.

The five 5S are:


JAPANESE ENGLISH FILIPINO
SEIRE SEIRE SURIIN-PILIIN
SEITON SYSTEMATIZE SINUPIN-IAYOS
SEISO SWEEP SIMUTIN-LINISIN
SEIKETSU SANITIZE SIGURUHIN-KALINISAN
SHITSUKE SELF-DISCIPLINE SARILING KUSA

Housekeeping habits
5S is the most basic and fundamental approach or principle applied in
a workplace, these principle serves as guides for productivity.

The housekeeping habits are:

1. SEIRE – Sort Out –Suriin-Piliin

“Take out unnecessary items and dispose”.

The first stage of 5S is to organize the work area, leaving only the tools
and materials necessary to perform daily activities. When “sorting” is well
implemented, communication between workers is improved and product
quality and productivity are increased.
It means sorting things into different categories, from most frequently
used items which you want to keep closer to your work area to less
frequently used items which you want to keep in a distant storage area, and
finally those you will never use, which of course, you want to dispose of.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
5S "Sort"
The First Step--Clean Out The
Junk Who Decides?
Sorting through objects in the This can be a delicate issue.
workplace is the first step. Generally, let the person who uses
Everything that moves should or owns the item decide. When
have a tag-- tools, parts, furniture several people within the work group
and personal objects. While the use the item, negotiation may be
procedure is simple, the decisions required.
are sometimes agonizing.
The Tags
Allocate a central "Red Tag Area" where
items go that cannot be simply thrown
in the trash.
Include disposal instructions if
necessary.
Appoint a review board for questionable
items. (You may not need it but someone
else may.)
Allocate a "Yellow Tag" location near the
workplace.
Review on a specific date.
Store occasionally necessary items in
out of the way locations.

Leave "Green Tag" items in the


workplace.
Set their final location later.

2. SEISO – Sweep –Simutin-Linisin

“Clean your workplace”.

The second stage of 5S is keeping everything clean and swept. This


maintains a safer work area and problem areas are quickly identified. An
important part of “shining” is “Mess Prevention.” In other words, don’t allow
litter, scrap, shavings, cuttings, etc., to land on the floor in the first place.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Benefits of 5S Shine
- Eliminate spring cleaning
- Incorporate cleaning into daily routine
- Maintain clean and ready-to-use equipment

We will help you


- Define shine target
- Identify shine methods
- Implement standardized cleanup

Make “Shine” a natural part of your work day


These process is to eliminate (or at least minimize) the need to clean
the work area through the development of innovative ideas.

5S "Shine"
The Second Step--Clean, Polish &
Guidelines for Shine
Paint
Each work team should
With only essential items establish their own measure of
remaining, it is time to "clean".
clean and paint. In some 5S
Establish a regular schedule
programs, cleaning and
for routine cleaning and deep
painting are considered separately.
cleaning.
Either way, it is likely to be done
over time. The entire team participates.
This is not something for a
The first cleaning leaves some dirt special janitorial crew.
and oil. The next cleaning looks
Ensure that each crew has
better and third cleaning will
adequate cleaning supplies
prepare for painting. All floors,
and equipment.
equipment, and almost every surface
should get paint.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
3. SEITON – Systematize –Sinupin-Iayos

“Arrange necessary items in good order”.

The third stage of 5S involves the orderly arrangement of needed items


so they are easy to use and accessible for “anyone” to find. Orderliness
eliminates waste in production and clerical activities.
Systematic arrangement of things: office supplies, jigs and tools,
documents, spare parts, and books, etc. for the most effective and efficient
retrieval. This requires a thorough analysis of current usage – how the
things you want to organize are used and who uses them.
5S "SET in Place"
The Third Step--Determining Locations should be identified at
Locations both a micro and sub-micro level.
String diagrams can assist at the
After Sort and Shine, "Set" micro-level. Principles of
determines and identifies the Ergonomics can assist at the sub-
location of each item. The methods micro level. Horizontal and vertical
for determining such locations may reach zones help to determine the
be elementary and intuitive or formal best sub-micro location. The
and elaborate. Often the elementary heaviest and most frequently used
methods work quite well, items should be in the nearest reach
especially during in the early zones.
phases. Workers simply look at each Once people develop awareness,
item, visualize its use, estimate the their body sense will alert them to
frequency of use and then select a excessive reaching, walking or
location. After a few days, they can awkward positions. They learn to
review and revise their locations. "SET" items instinctively.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Reach Zones To Determine Location Typical
Workstation "String Diagram" for Material
Flow
Boundaries

Boundaries identify the designated When combined with addresses


and location and space for each and nameplates, boundaries are
item. They encourage recoil that is a powerful tool for ensuring that
the proper return of an item, as every item returns to its proper
shown below. They also tend to place, every time.
prevent people from placing other
items in a designated space.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
The barrel should be A missing barrel is not Here, a boundary
here. obvious. designates the
proper location.

Clearly, something is An address informs us A complete address


missing. what Is missing. on both the barrel
and location
encourages its
return.

4. SEIKETSU – Sanitize/Standardize - Alagaan

“Maintain high standard of housekeeping”.

The fourth stage of 5S involves creating a consistent approach for


carrying out tasks and procedures. Orderliness is the core of
“standardization” and is maintained by Visual Controls. We will teach the
benefits of:
- Signboard strategy
- Signboard uses
- Painting strategy
- Colour-coding strategy
- Shadow boarding

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Standardize “Best Methods” across
the organization
Standardization is the process of doing away with the old habits. Once
you sort things out, systematically arranging and cleaning an area, it is
necessary to establish a standard for everyone to follow to maintain
cleanliness and orderliness.
5S "Standardize"
The Fourth Step--
Standardize
At minimum, standardize
the 5S activities shown
at the right. In some
programs, standardization
is used as an opportunity
to standardize normal
work activities and develop
work instructions.
Standardize 5S
Activities
Aisle Marking
Cleanliness
Standards
Color Schemes
Cleaning Schedules
Signage

5. SHITSUKE – Self Discipline – SarilingKusa

“Do thing spontaneously without being told or ordered”.

This last stage of 5S is the discipline and commitment of all other


stages. Without “sustaining”, your workplace can easily revert back to being
dirty and chaotic. That is why it is so crucial for your team to be empowered
to improve and maintain their workplace. When employees take pride in
their work and workplace it can lead to greater job satisfaction and higher
productivity.
Even if you set a standard, the need for training and educating every
member of the group must continue. It is necessary to upgrade the skills

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
and techniques of all the members of the workforce so that improvement
and higher productivity can be constantly sought after.
5S –Sustain
The Fifth Step--Sustain The This cannot be outsourced or
Program solved with software. Management,
Sustainment is usually the most top management, must reinforce it
difficult part of 5S. The attitudes and constantly with time, attention and
activities must be institutionalized repetition. Former military people,
and repeated until the become part especially battalion or company level
of the culture and the fabric of line officers are usually quite good at
everyday work. this. They are also good candidates
for Management Champion and for
The table below summarizes eight the Management Watch.
common tools that help with
sustainment. A combination of
several or all of these tools is usually
necessary.
Eight Tools to Sustain 5S

How to practice 5S:

SEIRE
STEP 1: Look around your workplace with your colleagues, discover and
identify items, which are unnecessary to your work. Then dispose all
unnecessary items.
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
STEP 2: If you and your colleagues cannot decide if an item is necessary or
not, put a disposal notice with the date on the item and set them aside.

STEP 3: After a certain period, check if someone needed the items or not.
Decide what to dispose.
Note: You must not forget to sort inside drawers, lockers and cabinets.

Practical “SEIRI” practices:


1. Never put personal efforts in the workplace.
2. Remove facilities other than what is being used.
3. Scrap useless molds and dies. Keep them at a position away from the
workplace when used on rare occasion.
4. Dispose of documents not used more than one (1) month on the desk or
drawer.
5. Do not put scrap of paper, old cloth, defective parts, tools, etc. on or
inside the shelf in the workplace.
6. Remove from the workplace all objects other than what are needed for
operation.
7. Control parts and materials in order to keep the minimum quality in the
workplace.

SEISO
STEP 1: Clean your workplace regularly.

STEP 2: Establish cleaning responsibilities.

STEP 3: Never throw anything and make it your habit.

STEP 4: Check while cleaning.


Note: A clean and orderly workplace is safe workplace.

Practical “SEISO” practices:


1. Always arrange cleaning tools and materials in order inside the locker
room.
2. Fix the cleaning time and the person in-charge. Assign responsible
person.
3. Pick up the littering dropped on the floor.
4. Wipe your machine to make it clean and remove chips from it everyday.
5. Check constantly the cleanliness and orderliness of your workplace.

SEITON
STEP 1: Make sure that all unnecessary items are eliminated from your
workplace.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
STEP 2: Decide where to put things, taking into consideration the point of
view of efficient operation, using the principle “put most frequently needed
items closer to the user so as to minimize the movement of the person”.

STEP 3: Make sure that everyone in the workplace know what and where
items are kept. It is preferred to make a list of items with their respective
locations, and label each drawer to show what is kept inside.
Note: the objective of SEITON is to make a safe and efficient workplace.

Practical “SEITON” practices:


1. Place tools in good order in the toolbox or put them into the holder
attached to the side of the production line.
2. Set up the depository for indirect parts or materials, like oil, solder,
grease, waste cloth, paper, etc, needed for the manufacturing and never put
excessive ones in the workplace.
3. Put parts or materials in proper places to maintain the best process
efficiency through process analysis.
4. It is important to view machine layout wide in three dimensions.
5. You should recognize that the process retarded and overflowing with
material unlike smooth flowing water in a river may be caused by a wrong
order.
6. Make a flow of production straight and direction of the flow is clear.
7. Arrange the installation of equipment and machine after the flow of
production line is properly fixed.

SEIKETSU
STEP 1: Create housekeeping maintenance system.

STEP 2: Promote housekeeping competition.


Note: Always maintain high standard of housekeeping.

Practical “SEIKETSU” practices:


1. Keep your working uniform clean.
2. Always make the place well ventilated and illuminated.
3. Floors should be free from oil spills.
4. Working tools should always be place and not scattered.
5. Always wear personal protective gears.

SHITSUKE
STEP 1: Treat your workplace your second home.

STEP 2: You are spending more of your waking time at your workplace than
at home.
STEP 3: The workplace is where you derive your income for you and your
family.
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Note: Managerial and supervisory people should show good examples.

Practical “SHITSUKE” practices:


1. Make sure that your workplace is just as clean and comfortable as your
home.
2. Be responsible enough in performing your work.
3. Take the initiative that discipline starts from him.

SUSTAINING AND IMPROVING 5S

LEVEL 1:

Clutter is everywhere

Disorganized

Tools are scattered

Worn-out and dirty facilities

Papers/pens/records on top of
tables

What have you in mind?

LEVEL 2:

May appear and clean

At first glance.

When you examine details you


would see items not needed in
work area.

Example:
o Tools are neatly piled but
piles are on the floor.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Problems at Level 2:

You find dirt, dust & items not


needed in corners, walls
pillars

Signage are faded

“Spaghetti” wiring are


exposed

Pathways are used/not


identified/marked
Others.

LEVEL 3:

Work areas are painted and


clean

Bulletin board info are


updated/current

Equipment are clean

Pathway are free from


obstructions and marked

Problems at Level 3:

Tabletops, cabinets, shelves are


still cluttered with tools, parts,
rags, papers, unused things,
etc.

Sometimes tools and other


parts are hard to find.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
LEVEL 4:

The following are used:


o Labels
o Numbering
Color-coding to indicate things
Tools are within easy reach
Cabinet and shelves are
organized and clean
Work can be done easily and
efficiently

Problems at Level 4:

Sustaining level 4 is difficult


Backsliding is apparent
Wastes sometimes piles up
before they are thrown.
Work in progress are piling up
after a day’s work
Run-out of critical stock
items

Corrective action to get To Level 5:

Set up system like super


markets.
Identify what cause the
problems and put up system to
eliminate them
Hold routine inspections
Correct finding ASAP
Device ways to dispose (4R +
Sell) of wastes.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
LEVEL 5:

Causes of dirt/wastes are


eliminated.

Workplace stays clean w/o much


sweeping

Everyone has practiced the habit


of sustaining the 5S

Reduction in wastes observed.

We are earning extra income from


wastes.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Self-Check #1.1-1

LO1. ENUMERATE, EXPLAIN AND APPLY OHS POLICIES AND


PROCEDURES IN ASSEMBLING AND DISASSEMBLING CONSUMER
ELECTRONICS PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS.

Multiple Choices: Choose the correct letter that best describes the
statement. Write your answers in capital letter on your answer sheet.

1. By putting boundaries is act of:


A. SEIKETSU
B. SEIRE
C. SEISO
D. SEITON

2. This is the most basic and fundamental approach for improving


productivity in all types business and particularly at plants and
factories.
A. 5S
B. SEIRE
C. SEISO
D. SEITON

3. Which of the following used signboard strategy.


A. SEIKETSU
B. SEIRE
C. SEISO
D. SEITON

4. “Take out unnecessary items and dispose”.Which of the following


are applicable to this?
A. SEIKETSU
B. SEIRE
C. SEISO
D. SEITON

5. SEISO practice this.


A. “Do thing spontaneously without being told or ordered”.
B. “Maintain high standard of housekeeping”.
C. “Arrange necessary items in good order”.
D. “Clean your workplace”.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
ANSWER KEY #1.1-1
Self-Check of #1.1-1

LO1. ENUMERATE, EXPLAIN AND APPLY OHS POLICIES AND


PROCEDURES IN ASSEMBLING AND DISASSEMBLING CONSUMER
ELECTRONICS PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS.

1. D
2. A
3. A
4. B
5. D

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
TASK SHEET 1.1-1

Title: Application of 5’S(SEIRE, SEISO, SEITON, SEIKETSU, and


SHITSUKE

Performance Objective: Given a shop scenario, the trainee must be able


to apply the 5’S principle in there responding
area and make and an evaluation to their jobs in
30 minutes following the prescribed format.

Supplies/Materials : Evaluation Form, Ballpen

Equipment : Cleaning materials.

Steps/Procedure:

A. Proceed to their respective area.


B. Analyze and apply the 5’S principles.
C. Evaluate their jobs base on this form:
EVALUTION FORM
The work area is… YES NO
Free from dust
Properly arrange
Properly label
No unwanted material

Assessment Method:

Demonstration, Evaluate Using Performance criteria checklist

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Information Sheet # 1.1-1A

LO1. ENUMERATE, EXPLAIN AND APPLY OHS POLICIES AND


PROCEDURES IN ASSEMBLING AND DISASSEMBLING CONSUMER
ELECTRONICS PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS.

Learning Objectives: In an electronics shop scenario, the trainee will be


able to enumerate, explain and apply the OHS policies and procedure in
assembling and disassembling consumer electronics products and systems
with-in 5 minutes.

Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)

Personal Protective Equipment, or PPE, is your last line of defense


against various workplace injuries.
A specialized clothing or equipmentworn by worker for
protectionagainst health and safety hazards.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Types of Personal Protective Equipment

PPE can be considered based on the type of protection

• Hearing Protection
• Hand Protection
• Eye and Face Protection
• Head Protection
• Respiratory protection
• Foot Protection

Hearing Protection

A device use to reduce the


noise exposure level and the
risk of hearing loss.

Types of Hearing Protection

1. Ear plugs

A devices that is inserted


into the ear canal. It is made
of foam, rubber or plastic.

Advantages Disadvantages
Some are disposable, some are requires more time to fit
reusable.
Lightweight, and require no more difficult to insert and remove
maintenance.
small and easily carried require good hygiene practices

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
2. Ear muffs

A device that is worn over


the head, like headphones.

Advantages Disadvantages
provide more consistent heavier than ear plugs
protection than ear plugs
one size fits most heads may be uncomfortable in hot
environments
easy to put on and take off eyeglass wearers may not get a
good seal
good for short jobs more expensive than other types of
HPDs

3. Ear canal caps

A device that covers the ear


canal entrance and is held in
place by a headband.

Advantages Disadvantages
Relatively easy to fit Cannot be used when noise levels
are in excess of 95 dB
One size fits most More expensive than earplugs
Can rest around neck when not Uncomfortable when worn for long
worn periods of time

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Head Protection

A hard covering for the


head to give protection
and eliminate injury.

Types of Head Protection

1. Helmets/Hard hats

A head protection device


which is designed to
protect against materials
falling from height and
swinging objects.

Hard hats are divided into three industrial classes

1. Class G (General)

• Designed to decrease the impact of falling objects.


• Reduces the danger of exposure to low voltage.
• Tested at 2200 volts (phase to ground).
• Formerly known as Class A.

2. Class E (Electrical)

• Designed to decrease the impact of falling objects.


• Reduces the danger of exposure to high voltage.
• Tested at 20,000 volts (phase to ground).
• Formerly known as Class B.

3. Class C (Conductive)

• Designed to decrease the impact of falling objects.


• Do not protect against electrical contact.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
2. Bump caps

A head protecting device which


is designed to protect from
knocking against stationary
objects.

3. Caps/Hair nets

It protects the head


against scalping and
entanglement.

Eye and Face Protection

A device use to protect the eye and


face against chemical,
environmental, radiological or
mechanical irritants and hazards.

Types of Eye and Face Protection

1. Safety Goggles

An eye protector fitting


the contour of the face and held
in position by an adjustable
head band. Bump caps

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
2. Face shield

A device which includes a


transparent visor, supported
in front of the face to shield
the eyes.

3. Safety spectacles

An eye protector with protective


lenses mounted in spectacle-type
frames.

Respiratory Protection

Devices that will protect the wearer's


respiratory system from overexposure by
inhalation to airborne contaminants

1. Disposable Dust masks

A masks that worn over the nose


and mouth to protect the respiratory
system from certain nuisance dusts,
mists, etc.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
2. Half-Face Respirators

A respirators with interchangeable


filter cartridges can protect the
respiratory system from hazardous
dusts, fumes, mists, etc.

3. Full-Face Respirators

A respirator operate under


the same principle and requirements
as the half-face type, however, they
offer a better face piece fit and also
protect the wearer's eyes from
particularly irritating gases or
vapors.

Foot Protection

A footwear use to prevent foot


injuries, such as Achilles tendon
strains and bruising

Types of Foot Protection

1. Steel-Reinforced Safety Shoes

This shoes are designed to protect


feet from common machinery
hazards such as falling or rolling
objects, cuts and punctures.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
2. Safety Boots

Safety boots offer more protection


when splash or spark hazards
(chemicals, molten materials)
are present.

Hand Protection

A devices that will protect the wearer's from direct contact to the heat
surface and other causing injuries.

1. Gloves

A fitted covering for the hand


with a separate sheath for each
finger and the thumb.

2. Hand pads

A thin, cushion like mass of


soft material used to fill,
to give shape, or to protect
against jarring, scraping,
or other injury.
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
3. Thumb Guards

A thin, cushion like mass of


soft material used to fill,
to give shape, or to protect
against jarring, scraping,
or other injury.

4. Forearms Cuffs

A thin, cushion like mass of


soft material used to fill,
to give shape, or to protect
against jarring, scraping,
or other injury.

5. Mittens

A type of glove or garment


that covers a hand with a
separate sheath for the
thumb, but not for other
fingers

6. Barrier Cream

A barrier between the skin


and the outside environment.

7. Finger Tape

A tape that protect the fingers


and hands without sacrificing
dexterity or flexibility.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Self-Check #1.1-1A

LO1. ENUMERATE, EXPLAIN AND APPLY OHS POLICIES AND


PROCEDURES IN ASSEMBLING AND DISASSEMBLING CONSUMER
ELECTRONICS PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS.

Multiple Choices: Choose the correct letter that best describes the
statement. Write your answers in capital letter on your answer sheet.

1. A thin, cushion like mass of soft material used to fill, to give shape, or
to protect against jarring, scraping, or other injury.
A. Barrier Cream
B. Gloves
C. Hand pads
D. Mittens
2. A tape that protect the fingers and hands without sacrificing dexterity
or flexibility.
A. Barrier Cream
B. Finger Tape
C. Gloves
D. Mittens
3. This devices that will protect the wearer's from direct contact to the
heat surface and other causing injuries.
A. Foot Protection
B. Hand Protection
C. Head Protection
D. Respiratory Protection
4. This device use to protect the eye and face against chemical,
environmental, radiological or mechanical irritants and hazards.
A. Eye and Face Protection
B. Hand Protection
C. Head Protection
D. Respiratory Protection
5. It protects the head against scalping and entanglement.
A. Bump caps
B. Caps/Hair nets
C. Hard hats
D. Helmets

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
ANSWER KEY #1.1-1A
Self-Check of #1.1-1

LO1. ENUMERATE, EXPLAIN AND APPLY OHS POLICIES AND


PROCEDURES IN ASSEMBLING AND DISASSEMBLING CONSUMER
ELECTRONICS PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS.

1. C
2. B
3. B
4. A
5. B

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
TASK SHEET 1.1-1A

Title: Identify the different types of Personal Protective Equipment

Performance Objective: Given a shop scenario, the trainee must be able


to identify the proper personal protective
equipment in their respective workplace in 25
minutes.

Supplies/Materials : Evaluation Form, Ballpen

Equipment : Different Personal Protective Equipments.

Steps/Procedure:

A. Proceed to their respective area.


B. Class role-playing.
C. Form a group of 5, each group compose of 5 members.
D. Each member of the group plays as one Personal Protective
Equipment and state and demonstrate their function.

Assessment Method:

Demonstration, Evaluate Using Performance criteria checklist

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Performance Criteria Checklist
Task Sheet #1.1-1A

CRITERIA YES NO
Did I...
1. Prepared Assembly workplace in accordance with OH&S
policies and procedures
2. Safety regulations and workplace safety andhazard control
practices and procedures are clarified and explained based on
organization procedures
3. Hazards/risks in the workplace and their corresponding
indicators are identified to minimize or eliminate risk to co-
workers, workplace and environment in accordance with
organization procedures
4. Contingency measures during workplace accidents, fire
and other emergencies are recognized and established in
accordance with organization procedures
5. Personal protective equipment (PPE) is correctly used in
accordance with organization OHS procedures and practices
6. Emergency-related drills and trainings are participated
in as per established organization guidelines and procedures
7. OHS personal records are completed and updated in
accordance with workplace requirements

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
PERFORMANCE TEST

Learner's Name Date


Competency: Apply OHS policies Test Attempt
1st 2nd 3rd

Directions: OVERALL EVALUATION

CALL INSTRUCTOR and ask Level


him/her to assess your Achie PERFORMANCE LEVELS
performance in the following ved
critical task and performance 4 - Can perform this skill without
criteria indicated below supervision and with initiative and
adaptability to problem situations.
You will be rated based on the 3 - Can perform this skill
overall evaluation outlined on satisfactorily without assistance or
the right side. supervision.
2 - Can perform this skill
satisfactorily but requires some
assistance and/or supervision.
1 - Can perform parts of this skill
satisfactorily, but requires
considerable assistance and/or
supervision.
Instructor will initial level achieved.

PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
For acceptable achievement, all items should receive a Yes No N/A
"Yes" or "N/A" response.
Prepared Assembly workplace in accordance with OH&S
policies and procedures
Safety regulations and workplace safety andhazard
control practices and procedures are clarified and
explained based on organization procedures
Hazards/risks in the workplace and their
corresponding indicators are identified to minimize or
eliminate risk to co-workers, workplace and
environment in accordance with organization
procedures
5S are identified
Functions of 5S are understood
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Perform well the application of 5S
Personal protective equipment (PPE) is correctly used
in accordance with organization OHS procedures and
practices
Personal protective equipment are identify
Function of each PPE are understood
PPE are properly in used

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Learning Outcome #2 Identify and explain the uses of different
types of tools, equipment and testing instruments.

CONTENTS:

Use and function of tools, equipment and testing instruments


Operation of equipment and testing instruments
Proper care and use of tools
Use of protective equipment and clothing

CONDITIONS:

Students/trainees must be provided with the following:


Learning elements and manuals
Working area/bench
PPE

EQUIPMENT TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES

● Multi-meter ● Long-nose pliers


● Oscilloscope ● Diagonal cutters
● Function generator ● Standard screwdrivers
● ESD free work bench ●Soldering iron, 30w
with mirror back-to- ●De-soldering iron, 30w
back/ one sided ●Screw driver assorted,
● High grade magnifying ●Phillips, slotted
glass with lamp ●Wrenches assorted
● PPE ●Allen wrench/key
● Working Area/bench ●Utility knife/stripper
● Sufficient lighting and ●Pliers assorted, long
ventilation system ●nose, side cutter
●Test jig

SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LEARNING MATERIALS

● Solder lead ● Handouts


●Cleaning brush ● Paper-based assessment form.
●lead free solder Assessment record book.
●rosin core solder Related textbooks
●wire stranded, #22, CDs for related film show
●different colors) CBLM
●silicon grease
●resistors (different values)
●capacitors (different
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
●values)
●transformer
●Learning materials
●Books and references

METHODOLOGIES:

● Demonstration
Research work
Role-playing

ASSESSMENT METHODS:
Return demonstration
Oral and written examinations / Paper and Pen Test
Direct Observation/ Interview
Practical examination

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Learning Experiences

Learning Outcome 2

DETERMINE LEARNER’S TRAINING REQUIREMENTS

Learning Activities Special Instructions


1. Read Information Sheet # 1.2-1
On Identify and Explain the
Uses/Function of different types of
tools, equipment and testing
instruments (Soldering Tools)
2. Answer Self-Check # 1.2-1 Compare answer with Answer Key
3. Read Information Sheet # 1.2-
1A(Handling and driving Tools)
4. Answer Self-Check # 1.2-1A Compare answer with Answer Key
5. Read Information Sheet # 1.2-
1B(Testing Instruments)
6. Answer Self-Check # 1.2-1B Compare answer with Answer Key
7.Read Information Sheet # 1.2-1C
(Basic Parts of Multi-Meter)
8. Answer Self-Check # 1.2-1C Compare answer with Answer Key
9.Read Information Sheet # 1.2-1D
(Safety handling of Multi-Meter)
10. Answer Self-Check #2.1-1D Compare answer with Answer Key
11. Perform Operation Task Sheet # Evaluate Using Performance criteria
1.2-1D checklist

12. Watch Video Clips This video clips will identify the
specific endangerments sites for the
trainee to apply safety and
precaution on these sites.

After doing all the activities of this


LO, you are ready to proceed to the
next LO on discuss the treatment
strategy with the client/patient.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Information Sheet # 1.2-1

LO2. IDENTIFY AND EXPLAIN THE USES/FUNCTION OF DIFFERENT


TYPES OF TOOLS, EQUIPMENT AND TESTING INSTRUMENTS

Learning Objectives: In an electronics shop scenario, the trainee will be


able to identify, explain the uses of different types of tools, and equipment
and testing instrument and their functions in assembling and disassembling
consumer electronics products and systems with-in 25 minutes.

Tools required for electronics

Soldering iron
A pointed metal tool heated for use in
melting and applying solder. Used for
joining the Pay attention to the "tip" of
the iron - the better quality ones have
a slightly duller-looking metal coating
on the very end, the last 1 cm. Irons
where the tip is all one silver/chrome
color are ok, but don't last as long. Be
sure to get one that is "grounded", i.e. has the larger (3-conductor) plug to
plug in the wall. The iron's power rating should be 15 to 25W and it should
be fitted with a small bit of 2 to 3mm diameter.

Other types of soldering iron


Low voltage soldering irons are available, but their extra safety is
undermined if you have a mains lead to their power supply! Temperature
controlled irons are excellent for frequent use, but not worth the extra
expense if you are a beginner. Gas-powered irons are designed for use
where no mains supply is available and are not suitable for everyday use.
Pistol shaped solder guns are far too powerful and cumbersome for normal
electronics use.

Soldering iron stand


You must have a safe place to put the iron when
you are not holding it. The stand should include a
sponge which can be dampened for cleaning the
tip of the iron.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
De-soldering pump (solder sucker)
A tool for removing solder when de-
soldering a joint to correct a mistake or
replace a component.

Solder remover wick (copper braid)


This is an alternative to the de-soldering pump shown
above.
Not absolutely necessary, but helps clean up when
you've put too much solder somewhere. It's a roll of
braided copper, that when heated will suck up excess
solder. Alternatively you can use a "solder sucker", a spring-loaded vacuum
tube, not shown.

Reel of solder
Solder is an alloy (mixture) of tin and lead, typically
60% tin and 40% lead. It melts at a temperature of
about 200°C. Coating a surface with solder is called
'tinning' because of the tin content of solder. Lead is
poisonous and you should always wash your hands
after using solder.

Solder for electronics use contains tiny cores of flux, like


the wires inside a mains flex. The flux is corrosive, like an acid, and it cleans
the metal surfaces as the solder melts. This is why you must melt the solder
actually on the joint, not on the iron tip. Without flux most joints would fail
because metals quickly oxidize and the solder itself will not flow properly
onto a dirty, oxidized, metal surface.

The best size of solder for electronics is 22swg (swg = standard wire gauge).

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Self-Check #1.2-1

LO2. IDENTIFY AND EXPLAIN THE USES/FUNCTION OF DIFFERENT


TYPES OF TOOLS, EQUIPMENT AND TESTING INSTRUMENTS

Multiple Choices: Choose the correct letter that best describes the
statement. Write your answers in capital letter on your answer sheet.

1. This tool is the resting place of soldering iron.


A. Soldering Gun
B. Soldering Iron
C. Soldering Pump
D. Soldering Stand

2. This is used to clean the un-solder lead to copper plate.


A. Solder Lead
B. Solder Pump
C. Solder Wick
D. Soldering Stand

3. This tool is use for joining the two terminals.


A. Screw Driver
B. Solder
C. Solder Wick
D. Soldering Iron

4. This are used for joining, it composed of tin and lead.


A. PCB Holder
B. PCB Rubber
C. Reel of Solder
D. Solder Wick

5. This tool is used to removing solder when soldering is incorrect.


A. De-soldering pump
B. Solder Wick
C. Soldering Iron
D. Soldering Stand

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
ANSWER KEY #1.2-1
Self-Check of #1.2-1

LO2. IDENTIFY AND EXPLAIN THE USES/FUNCTION OF DIFFERENT


TYPES OF TOOLS, EQUIPMENT AND TESTING INSTRUMENTS

1. D
2. C
3. D
4. C
5. A

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Information Sheet # 1.2-1A

LO2. IDENTIFY AND EXPLAIN THE USES/FUNCTION OF DIFFERENT


TYPES OF TOOLS, EQUIPMENT AND TESTING INSTRUMENTS

Learning Objectives: In an electronics shop scenario, the trainee will be


able to identify, explain the uses of different types of tools, and equipment
and testing instrument and their functions in assembling and disassembling
consumer electronics products and systems with-in 25 minutes.

Handling and driving Tools

Side cutters
For trimming component leads close to the circuit board.

Wire strippers
Is a small, hand-held device used to strip the
electrical insulation from electric wires.Most
designs include a cutter as well, but they are not
suitable for trimming component leads.

Small pliers
Usually called 'snipe nose' pliers, these are for
bending component leads etc. If you put a strong
rubber band across the handles the pliers make a
convenient holder for parts such as switches while
you solder the contacts.

Small flat-blade screwdriver


For scraping away excess flux and dirt
between tracks, as well as driving screws!

Heat sink
Used protect the component into over heat when soldering.
You can buy a special tool, but a standard crocodile clip
works just as well and is cheaper.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
The following tool is only required if you are using strip board:

Track cutter
A 3mm drill bit can be used instead; in fact the tool is usually
just a 3mm drill bit with a proper handle fitted.

The following tools are only required if you make your own PCBs:

PCB rubber
This is an abrasive rubber for cleaning PCBs. It can also be
used to clean strip board where the copper tracks have
become dull and tarnished.

Small electric drill

Ideally this should be mounted in a drill stand. You will


need a range of small drill bits, but for most holes a 1mm
bit is suitable. Larger
holes can be drilled
with a hand drill but
1mm bits are too
fragile to use reliably
in a hand drill.

PCB Holder
Ideally this should be
mounted in a solder stand. Used to
hold the PCB when solder.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Self-Check #1.2-1A

LO2. IDENTIFY AND EXPLAIN THE USES/FUNCTION OF DIFFERENT


TYPES OF TOOLS, EQUIPMENT AND TESTING INSTRUMENTS

Multiple Choices: Choose the correct letter that best describes the
statement. Write your answers in capital letter on your answer sheet.

1. This is a handling and bending tool :


A. Heat sink
B. Side cutters
C. Small pliers
D. Wire strippers

2. This will hold the PCB when you are solder.


A. Multi-meter
B. PCB holder
C. Small electric drill
D. Small pliers

3. This tool is use to absorb the heat when soldering the component.
A. Heat Sink
B. Solder wick
C. Soldering Stand
D. Track Cutter

4. A tool used to clean the stripe board to be soldered.


A. Long nose
B. PCB holder
C. PCB rubber
D. Small electric drill

5. This tool is used to cut the excess terminal lead.


A. De-soldering pump
B. Side Cutters
C. Small pliers
D. Wire strippers

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
ANSWER KEY #1.2-1A
Self-Check of #1.2-1A

LO2. IDENTIFY AND EXPLAIN THE USES/FUNCTION OF DIFFERENT


TYPES OF TOOLS, EQUIPMENT AND TESTING INSTRUMENTS

1. C
2. B
3. A
4. C
5. B

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Information Sheet # 1.2-1B

LO2. IDENTIFY AND EXPLAIN THE USES/FUNCTION OF DIFFERENT


TYPES OF TOOLS, EQUIPMENT AND TESTING INSTRUMENTS

Learning Objectives: In an electronics shop scenario, the trainee will be


able to identify, explain the uses of different types of testing instrument and
their functions in assembling and disassembling consumer electronics
products and systems with-in 25 minutes.

Testing Instruments

Multi-meter is a measuring instrument. It can be used to measure


voltage, current and resistance.
Technical term for multi-meter is tester; it is also called Volt-Ohm
Meter or (VOM).
An analog meter moves a needle along a scale. The function of the
meter can be changed by switching the dial.
Most modern multi-meters are digital. Similar to analog ones, digital
multi-meter has a dial to select its function. However, instead of having to
interpret the reading of an analog scale, the data is shown directly in digital
format on the LCD display.
Multi-meters are very useful test instruments. By operating a multi-
position switch on the meter they can be quickly and easily set to be a
voltmeter, an ammeter or an ohmmeter. They have several settings (called
'ranges') for each type of meter and the choice of AC or DC. Some multi-
meters have additional features such as transistor testing and ranges for
measuring capacitance and frequency.

Two type of a multi-meter

Digital Multi-Meter
Analogue Multi-Meter

Digital multi-meters
All digital meters contain a battery to power the
display so they use virtually no power from the circuit
under test. This means that on their DC voltage ranges they
have a very high resistance (usually called input
impedance) of 1M or more, usually 10M , and they are Digital Multi-meter
very unlikely to affect the circuit under test.

Typical ranges for digital multi-meters like the one illustrated:

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
(The values given are the maximum reading on each range)

DC Voltage: 200mV, 2000mV, 20V, 200V, 600V.


AC Voltage: 200V, 600V.
DC Current: 200µA, 2000µA, 20mA, 200mA, 10A*.
*The 10A range is usually un-fused and connected via a special
socket.
AC Current: None. (You are unlikely to need to measure this).
Resistance: 200 , 2000 , 20k , 200k , 2000k , Diode Test.

Digital meters have a special diode test setting because their resistance
ranges cannot be used to test diodes and other semiconductors.

Digital display
Values can be read directly from digital displays so
they are easy to read accurately. It is normal for the
least significant digit (on the right) to continually change
between two or three values, this is a feature of the way digital meters work,
not an error! Normally you will not need great precision and the least
significant digit can be ignored or rounded up.

Digital meters may be connected either way round without damage; they
will show a minus sign (-) when connected in reverse. If you exceed the
maximum reading most digital meters show an almost blank display with
just a 1 on the left-hand side.

All digital meters contain a battery to power the display so they use
virtually no power from the circuit under test. This means that digital
voltmeters have a very high resistance (usually called input impedance) of
1MΩ or more, usually 10MΩ, and they are very unlikely to affect the circuit
under test.

For general use digital meters are the best type. They are easy to read,
they may be connected in reverse and they are unlikely to affect the circuit
under test.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Analogue multi-meters
Analogue meters take a little power from the
circuit under test to operate their pointer. They must
have a high sensitivity of at least 20k /V or they may
upset the circuit under test and give an incorrect
reading. See the section below on sensitivity for more
details.

Batteries inside the meter provide power for the


resistance ranges, they will last several years but you
should avoid leaving the meter set to a resistance
range in case the leads touch accidentally and run
the battery flat.

Typical ranges for analogue multi-meters like the Analogue Multi-meter


one illustrated:
(the voltage and current values given are the maximum reading on each
range)

DC Voltage: 0.5V, 2.5V, 10V, 50V, 250V, 1000V.


AC Voltage: 10V, 50V, 250V, 1000V.
DC Current: 50µA, 2.5mA, 25mA, 250mA.
A high current range is often missing from this type of meter.
AC Current: None. (You are unlikely to need to measure this).
Resistance: 20 , 200 , 2k , 20k , 200k .
These resistance values are in the middle of the scale for each range.

It is a good idea to leave an analogue multi-meter set to an AC voltage


range such as 1000V when not in use. It is less likely to be damaged by
careless use on this range, and there is a good chance that it will be the
range you need to use next anyway!

Sensitivity of an analogue multi-meter


Multi-meters must have a high sensitivity of at least 20k /V
otherwise their resistance on DC voltage ranges may be too low to avoid
upsetting the circuit under test and giving an incorrect reading. To obtain
valid readings the meter resistance should be at least 10 times the circuit
resistance (take this to be the highest resistor value near where the meter is
connected). You can increase the meter resistance by selecting a higher
voltage range, but this may give a reading which is too small to read
accurately!

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Analogue display
Analogue displays have a pointer which moves
over a graduated scale. They can be difficult to read
because of the need to work out the value of the
smallest scale division. For example the scale in the
picture has 10 small divisions between 0 and 1 so
each small division represents 0.1. The reading is
therefore 1.25V (the pointer is estimated to be half way between 1.2 and
1.3).

The maximum reading of an analogue meter is called full-scale


deflection or FSD (it is 5V in the example shown).

Analogue meters must be connected the correct way round to prevent


them being damaged when the pointer tries to move in the wrong direction.
They are useful for monitoring continuously changing values (such as the
voltage across a capacitor discharging) and they can be good for quick rough
readings because the movement of the pointer can be seen without looking
away from the circuit under test.

Taking accurate readings


To take an accurate reading from
an analogue scale you must have your
eye in line with the pointer. Avoid looking
at an angle from the left or right because
you will see a reading which is a little too
high or too low. Many analogue meters
have a small strip of mirror along the
scale to help you. When your eye is in the Correct Wrong
correct position the reflection of the reflection hidden reflection visible
pointer is hidden behind the pointer itself. If you can see the reflection you
are looking at an angle.

Instead of a mirror, some meters have a twisted pointer to aid


accurate readings. The end of the pointer is turned through 90° so it
appears very thin when viewed correctly.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Self-Check #1.2-1B

LO2. IDENTIFY AND EXPLAIN THE USES/FUNCTION OF DIFFERENT


TYPES OF TOOLS, EQUIPMENT AND TESTING INSTRUMENTS

Multiple Choices: Choose the correct letter that best describes the
statement. Write your answers in capital letter on your answer sheet.

1. A type of multi-meter (Tester) having a scale:


A. Analogue Multi-meter
B. Digital Multi-meter
C. Speedometer
D. Taco-meter

2. An electronics measuring device that capable to measure


voltage, current and resistance.
A. Multi-meter (Tester)
B. Range Selector Switch
C. Speedometer
D. Taco-meter

3. This multi-meter (Tester) displaying the actual reading.


A. Analogue Multi-meter
B. Digital Multi-meter
C. Speedometer
D. Taco-meter

4. The accurate reading in analogue meter must be;


A. The reflection of the pointer to the mirror are hidden to
the pointer
B. The reflection of the pointer are showing to the right
C. The reflection of the pointer are showing to the left
D. The reflection of the pointer are shown

5. Multi-meter (Tester) can measured;


A. Current only
B. Resistance only
C. Voltage only
D. Voltage, Current and Resistance

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
ANSWER KEY #1.2-1B
Self-Check of #1.2-1B

LO2. IDENTIFY AND EXPLAIN THE USES/FUNCTION OF DIFFERENT


TYPES OF TOOLS, EQUIPMENT AND TESTING INSTRUMENTS

1. A
2. A
3. B
4. A
5. D

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Information Sheet # 1.2-1C

LO2. IDENTIFY AND EXPLAIN THE USES/FUNCTION OF DIFFERENT


TYPES OF TOOLS, EQUIPMENT AND TESTING INSTRUMENTS

Learning Objectives: In an electronics shop scenario, the trainee will be


able to identify, explain the uses of different types of tools, and equipment
and testing instrument and their functions in assembling and disassembling
consumer electronics products and systems with-in 25 minutes.

1. Zero
1.Corrector
ZeroIndicators:
Corrector
This is a part of the
Indicators:
2. Ohms Adjusting Knob:
multi-tester where

ThisThisisis aapart of the


to adjust the pointer

part
if not in the
extreme zero line at This isisa part
This of the
a part
multi-tester
of the multi- where
the left side.
of thetester used in
multi-
to adjust
tester where to the pointer testeradjusting
used the to
adjustif not the in the pointer to thethe
adjusting
extreme if
pointer zeronot
line at extreme zero
pointer tolinetheat
the
in the extremeleft side. extreme zero
the right side.
zero line at the line at the
left side. right side.

3. Indicator Pointer: 4. Range Selector Switch:


This isisa part
This of the
a part This
This isisa part
a part
of the
of tester
the used as the
multi- of the tester
tester used as a
finger ofused
tester the tester
as used
switchingasknoba used
theand used as the
finger of switching
in selecting what
the tester
indicate and
the reading. knobrangeused in
to be used
used as the selecting what
indicate the range to be
reading. used.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
5. Face Plate/Meter Scale: 6. Test Prods.
This isisa part
This of the
a part ThisThis is
is a apartpart
of the
testertester
of the where the of tester
the are cords with
tester
where
actual the
reading is arepinscord
used inwith
testing
actualseen. reading pins used
electrical outletinand
is seen. testing
electrical/Electronics
electrical
components.
outlet and
electrical/
electronic
components.

7. Range Panel Plate: 8. Female Receptacles (N and P)


This is a part of the
This is a part This is a part of the
testertester
of the and it is a panel Thistester
is aandpart
it is a two
and it is a a certain
for selecting of the tester
holes where to insert
range.for
panel It can be a volts, and ittheistest
twoprods
resistance,
selecting a etc. holes where to
certain range. insert the test
It can be a prods.
volts,
resistance, etc.

9. Strap:
This isisa part
This of the
a part
tester used
of the tester as a hold
the tester
used as toaavoid
hold
falling
the tester the ground.
to
avoid falling to
the ground.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Self-Check #1.2-1C

LO2. IDENTIFY AND EXPLAIN THE USES/FUNCTION OF DIFFERENT


TYPES OF TOOLS, EQUIPMENT AND TESTING INSTRUMENTS

Multiple Choices: Choose the correct letter that best describes the
statement. Write your answers in capital letter on your answer sheet.

1. Basic part of a multi-meter that can read the value of the measure:
A. Indicator Pointer
B. Meter Scale
C. Range Selector Switch
D. Test prod/probe

2. Part of a multi-meter that used to indicate the reading.


A. Indicator Pointer
B. Meter Scale
C. Range Selector Switch
D. Test prod/probe

3. Basic part of a multi meter using for calibrating the pointer


extremely to the zero right position.
A. Ohms adjusting knob
B. Range Selector Switch
C. Strap
D. Zero corrector indicator

4. Basic part of a multi meter using for calibrating the pointer


extremely to the zero left position.
A. Ohms adjusting knob
B. Range Selector Switch
C. Strap
D. Zero corrector indicator

5. Basic parts of multi-meter that is directly contact to the test point.


A. Indicator Pointer
B. Meter Scale
C. Range Selector Switch
D. Test prod/probe

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
ANSWER KEY #1.2-1C
Self-Check of #1.2-1C

LO2. IDENTIFY AND EXPLAIN THE USES/FUNCTION OF DIFFERENT


TYPES OF TOOLS, EQUIPMENT AND TESTING INSTRUMENTS

1. B
2. A
3. A
4. D
5. D

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
TASK SHEET 1.2-1C

Title: Familiarization of Multi-meter or Tester

8. Female Receptacles (N and P)


Performance Objective: Given a shop scenario, the trainee must be able to
identify the differentparts of a multi-meter or tester in
5 minutes following the prescribed format.

Supplies/Materials This is a part of the


: Paper and Ball pen.

Equipment tester and it is a two


: Multi-meter (Tester)

Steps/Procedure:
holes where to insert
the test prods
1. Get your multi-meter (Tester).
2. Fill-up Table A.
3. Then fill-up Figure A.

I. Table A:
Analogue Digital
Brand Model Serial Brand Model Serial
Name No. No. Name No.

9.________________
II. Figure A:
1.________________

2.________________

3.________________

4.________________
10._______________
10._______________
_
_
5.________________ 7.________________

6.________________ 8.________________

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
III. Question & Answer:
Read carefully the following question and answer on your own:
1. Explain the function of pointer or indicator pointer?
2. Differentiate the difference between zero corrector indicator
and ohms adjusting knob.
3. Based on your own perception what is the importance of the
Negative and Positive test prod/probe? Why?
IV. Conclusion:

Assessment Method:

Demonstration, Evaluate Using Performance criteria checklist

Performance Criteria Checklist


Task Sheet #1.2-1C

CRITERIA YES NO
Did I..
1. Identify the following different parts of multi-meter
(Tester)?
a. Zero corrector Indicator.
b. Ohms adjusting knob.
c. Indicator or Pointer.
d. Range selector switch.
e. Face plate/ Meter scale.
f. Test prods/probes.
g. Range panel plate.
h. Female receptacles (N & P).
i. Strap.
2. Apply safety precautions and procedures observed?

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Information Sheet # 1.2-1D

LO2. IDENTIFY AND EXPLAIN THE USES/FUNCTION OF DIFFERENT


TYPES OF TOOLS, EQUIPMENT AND TESTING INSTRUMENTS

Learning Objectives: In an electronics shop scenario, the trainee will be


able to identify, explain the uses of different types of tools, and equipment
and testing instrument and their functions in assembling and disassembling
consumer electronics products and systems with-in 25 minutes.

1. 1. Never
Never drop or drop
fall the
1. Never drop or fall the
ground this multi-
2. Never exposed
2. Never exposed it to
or fall
ground thetester
this multi- it may ruin the
mechanical parts. it to water,
water, sunlight or
tester it may ruinthis
ground the moisture to
sunlight oravoid
mechanical parts. rusting the
tester it may moisture to
mechanical parts.
ruin the avoid rusting
mechanical the mechanical
parts. parts.

3. Always set the 4. Replaced the


3. Always
rangeset the range
selector battery
4. Replacedifthe not in
battery
selectorto
knob knob to
1000 used for a
if not in used for a
longer period of time
1000 volts
volts AC if not in in
if not longer period
and to avoid theof
use or always
use or always SET time and avoid
battery in rust and
damp.
the
SETrange selector
knob in OFF the battery in
knob in OFF
POSITION. rust and damp.
POSITION.

5. Never5.test
Neverthe
test the
VOLTAGE IF THE
VOLTAGE if the
RANGE SELECTOR
range KNOB
selector
IS SET IN
knob isRESISTANCE.
set in
RESISTANCE.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Self-Check #1.2-1D

LO2. IDENTIFY AND EXPLAIN THE USES/FUNCTION OF DIFFERENT


TYPES OF TOOLS, EQUIPMENT AND TESTING INSTRUMENTS

Multiple Choices: Choose the correct letter that best describes the
statement. Write your answers in capital letter on your answer sheet.

1. What would you change in our multi-meter when you will not in
use for a longer of time?
A. Battery
B. Indicator Pointer
C. Meter Scale
D. Test prod/probe

2. When falling our multi-meter what will happen?


A. The cases must be broken.
B. The mechanical parts must be ruin.
C. The meter scale window is broken.
D. The test prod are loose

3. When the multi-meter is temporarily not in used you must.


A. Remove the battery
B. Set to resistance
C. Turn off
D. Un-plug

4. For caring our multi-meter (Tester) we do the following except.


A. Never drop or fall the ground this multi-meter
B. Never exposed to the water or sunlight to avoid moisture
C. Never test the voltage if the range selector knob is set in
resistance
D. Replaced the battery if not used for a longer period of time

5. For caring our multi-meter (Tester) we do the following except.


A. Exposed to the water or sunlight to avoid moisture
B. Never drop or fall the ground this multi-meter
C. Replaced the battery if not used for a longer period of time
D. Test the voltage if the range selector knob is set in resistance

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
ANSWER KEY #1.2-1D
Self-Check of #1.2-1D

LO2. IDENTIFY AND EXPLAIN THE USES/FUNCTION OF DIFFERENT


TYPES OF TOOLS, EQUIPMENT AND TESTING INSTRUMENTS

1. A
2. B
3. C
4. B
5. D

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
OPERATION SHEET 1.2-1D

Title: Maintenance of Multi-meter or Tester

Performance Objective: Given a shop scenario, the trainee must be able to


take the maintenance and calibrating a multi-meter
or tester in 5 minutes following the prescribed
format.
Supplies/Materials : Battery (AA) and 9 Volts.

Equipment : Multi-meter (Tester), Philip screw driver; flat screw

Steps/Procedure:

a. Get your multi-meter (Tester).


b. Open the back case of the tester by using the screw driver
either flat or Philip screw driver.
c. Inspect if there is a battery (AA) and 9 Volt if ever.
d. Check the physical appearance of the battery if there is a leak
or damage.
e. Change the battery if damage.
f. Then closed it, by returning the back case and tie the screw
by using either flat or Philip screw driver.
g. Connect the two test probe to the female receptacle (N & P)
Black test probe to the negative or common (-com) terminal
and Red test probe to the positive (+) terminal, if ever the test
probe are detachable.
h. Position your multi-meter (Tester) in upright position at the
angle of 45 degrees (45°) facing to you.
i. Look directly at the face plate/meter scale.
j. Observe the pointer at the left side position if the pointer is
extremely in zero position by looking at the mirror, if you not
see shadow of the pointer.
k. If you can see the shadow of the pointer, get the flat screw
driver and turn slowly to the right or left zero corrector
indicator until you should not see the shadow.
l. Set the range selector switch to Rx1.
m. Short the two test probe by connecting the tip of red test
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
probe (positive) to the tip of black test probe (negative).
n. Then observe the pointer moving extremely to the right and if
the pointer is position to the zero ohm (Ω).
o. If not in zero ohm (Ω); don’t remove the connection of the two
tips of the test probe and adjust the zero ohms adjusting
knob until the pointer is in zero position and the shadow will
not see.
p. Now your multi-meter is already calibrated and ready to use.

Note: - when you adjusting the zero adjusting knob, observe if the pointer
will not response going to zero that means the battery of our multi-meter
(Tester) is already discharge or not enough/insufficient so you can change it.
Some of our multi-tester having a electric shock protection to prevent
damage to our unit/s by means of fuse protection. (Replace the fuse
with the same current (ampere) / voltage (volt) rating shown at the
back of your multi-meter (Tester) or ready it the user manual of the
multi-meter (tester).

Assessment Method:

Demonstration, Evaluate Using Performance criteria checklist

Performance Criteria Checklist


Task Sheet #1.2-1D

CRITERIA YES NO
Did I..
1. Prepared the tools and equipments?
2. Handle with care the tools?
3. Do the Do’s and Don’ts?
3. Apply safety precautions and procedures observed?

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
PERFORMANCE TEST

Learner's Name Date


Competency: Identification of different tools and Test Attempt
their function 1st 2nd 3rd

Directions: OVERALL EVALUATION

CALL INSTRUCTOR and ask Level


him/her to assess your Achie PERFORMANCE LEVELS
performance in the following ved
critical task and performance 4 - Can perform this skill without
criteria indicated below supervision and with initiative and
adaptability to problem situations.
You will be rated based on the 3 - Can perform this skill
overall evaluation outlined on satisfactorily without assistance or
the right side. supervision.
2 - Can perform this skill
satisfactorily but requires some
assistance and/or supervision.
1 - Can perform parts of this skill
satisfactorily, but requires
considerable assistance and/or
supervision.
Instructor will initial level achieved.

PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
For acceptable achievement, all items should receive a Yes No N/A
"Yes", “No” or "N/A" response.
Tools and equipments in assemble and disassemble of
consumer products are identified
Functions of different tools are understood
Proper used of different tools accordance to their
specification
VOM is properly used
Safety are apply while using tools accordance to the
OH&S

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Information Sheet # 1.2-1E

LO2. IDENTIFY AND EXPLAIN THE USES/FUNCTION OF DIFFERENT


TYPES OF TOOLS, EQUIPMENT AND TESTING INSTRUMENTS

Learning Objectives: In an electronics shop scenario, the trainee will be


able to identify, explain the uses of different types of tools, and equipment
and testing instrument and their functions in assembling and disassembling
consumer electronics products and systems with-in 25 minutes.

The ohmmeter is one of the uses in V.O.M.


The ohmmeter is an instrument used to
measures the resistance of the motor winding
and the electrical circuits. The unit of the
resistance is OHMS (Ω). An ohmmeter has a
several ranges like Rx1, Rx10, Rx100,
Rx1K, Rx10K and R100K.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
OHMMETER Scales:

The Ohmmeter scale is found in the upper part of the meter scale
above the mirror. They are read from right to left.
The ohmmeter scale is composing of major and minor scale: Major
scale is the bigger lines and Minor scale is the smallest lines.

Major

Minor

The ohmmeter scale read


from right to left, start from Zero
(0).
The scale from Zero (0) to
One (1) are compose of 1 Major
and 4 Minor.

Equivalent per scale:


Minor = 0.2
Major = 1

The scale from One (1) to Two


(2) are compose of 1 Major and
4 Minor.

Equivalent per scale:


Minor = 0.2
Major = 1

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
The scales from “2” to “5”
arecomposing of 3 Major and
3 Minor.

Equivalent per scale:


Minor = 0.5
Major = 1

The scales from “5” to “10” are


composing of 5 Major and 5
Minor.

Equivalent per scale:


Minor = 0.5
Major = 1

The scales from “10” to


“20” are composing of 2
Major and 8 Minor.

Equivalent per scale:


Minor = 1
Major = 5

The scales from “20” to


“30” are composing of
1 Major and 4 Minor.

Equivalent per scale:


Minor = 2
Major = 10

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
The scales from “30” to
“50” are composing of 2
Major and 8 Minor.

Equivalent per scale:


Minor = 2
Major = 10

The scales from “50” to “100” are


composing of 5 Major and 5 Minor.

Equivalent per scale:


Minor = 5
Major = 10

The scales from “100” to “200” are


composing of 1 Major and 4 Minor.

Equivalent per scale:


Minor = 20
Major = 100

The scales from “200” to “500”


are composing of 3 Major and 1
Minor.

Equivalent per scale:


Minor = 50
Major = 100
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
The scales from “500” to “1K” or “1000” are
composing of 1 Major and No Minor.

Equivalent per scale:


Minor =
Major = 500

Note: K = 1000

The scales from “1K” to “2K” are composing of


1 Major and No Minor.

Equivalent per scale:


Minor =
Major = 500

Note: K = 1000


The infinity ( ) sign mean very high
resistance or can’t be measured.

How to use the Ohmmeter:

NOTE:

1. Always set the pointer of an ohmmeter carefully to the zero resistance


point on the scale by means of the zero corrector indicators.

2. Change the ohmmeter batteries promptly when the meter can no


longer be set to zero.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Procedures:
1. Open the back case of the tester by using the screw driver either flat or
Philip screw driver to insert the battery then closed it.
2. Be sure that the device is disconnected from the power source.
3. Insert the test prods to the female receptacles of the tester, the red test
prod to the positive sign; the black test prods to the negative sign.
4. Set the indicator pointer to zero resistance on the scale by connecting the
two tests prods.
5. Adjust the range selector switch to a selected range.
6. Short circuit the test prods and zero in the indicator pointer by adjusting
the ohms adjusting knob
7. If the resistance value cannot be read accurately on the selected scales,
switch to a new range and repeat step 4.
8. Test the resistance of the specific device and read the measurement in
OHM scale.
9. You get the measured value by multiply the reading on the scale by range

Example:

A B C

Pointer “A”
Range = x1 “the pointer deflect at second major position; between 50 to
100 scale.”

Measured value = Scale Reading x Range = 70 x 1 = 70Ω

Note: don’t forget the unit value; (Ω) ohm for resistance.

Pointer “B”
Range = x10 “the pointer deflect at second minor position; between 20 to
30 scale.”

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Major value = 20
Minor value = 2
Add the Value of major and minor = 20 (Major) + 2 (2/Minor) = 24
So the Measured value = Reading x Range = 24 x 10 = 240Ω

Pointer “C” is another case of reading; every movement of the pointer will
be count so that this case the position of the pointer is not exactly in the
major and minor scale or in between the scale.

Range = x 1k “The pointer stops in between two minor position; between


10 to 20 scale.”
Major value = 10
Minor value = 1
Half minor value = 0.5
Add the Value of major and minor = 10 (Major) + 1 (1/Minor) + 0.5 (Half
Minor) = 11.5
So that measured value = 11.5 x 1k = 11.5kΩ or 11,5000Ω

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Self-Check #1.2-1E

LO2. IDENTIFY AND EXPLAIN THE USES/FUNCTION OF DIFFERENT


TYPES OF TOOLS, EQUIPMENT AND TESTING INSTRUMENTS

Multiple Choices: Choose the correct letters that best describe the
statement. Write your answers in capital letter on your answer sheet.

1. The ohmmeter scale compose of big line and small line; that is called:
A. Major and Minor Scale
B. Minor Scale
C. Major Scale
D. Scale

2. Using ohmmeter the measured value of the resistance is result of;


A. Major and minor scale
B. Reading on scale
C. Range
D. Reading on scale multiply to the range

3. The small line in a meter scale of the ohmmeter is called.


A. Major and Minor Scale
B. Minor Scale
C. Major Scale
D. Scale

4. The bigger line in a meter scale of the ohmmeter is called.


A. Major and Minor Scale
B. Minor Scale
C. Major Scale
D. Scale

5. The maximum scale of the ohmmeter.


A. 10k
B. 100k
C. 1k
D. 2k

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
ANSWER KEY #1.2-1E
Self-Check of #1.2-1E

LO2. IDENTIFY AND EXPLAIN THE USES/FUNCTION OF DIFFERENT


TYPES OF TOOLS, EQUIPMENT AND TESTING INSTRUMENTS

1. A
2. D
3. B
4. C
5. D

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
TASK SHEET # 1.2-1E
Title: Resistance Measurement
Performance Objective: The trainee must be able to measure the resistance
of the resistor.
Supplies/Materials : Paper and Ball pen, Resistor (assorted) 10pcs.
Equipment: Multi-meter
Steps/Procedure:
1. Prepared the following materials.
2. Arrange the resistor by numbering from 1 to 10.
3. Measured the resistance of each resistor using the different range.
4. Record the measured value by filling-up table A.
Table A.
Resistor No. Reading (Meter Scale) Range Measured Value
X1
X10
X100
1
X1K
X10K
X100K
X1
X10
X100
2
X1K
X10K
X100K
X1
X10
X100
3
X1K
X10K
X100K
X1
X10
X100
4
X1K
X10K
X100K
5 X1
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
X10
X100
X1K
X10K
X100K
X1
X10
X100
6
X1K
X10K
X100K
X1
X10
X100
7
X1K
X10K
X100K
X1
X10
X100
8
X1K
X10K
X100K
X1
X10
X100
9
X1K
X10K
X100K
X1
X10
X100
10
X1K
X10K
X100K
Assessment Method:

Demonstration, Evaluate Using Performance criteria checklist

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Performance Criteria Checklist
Task Sheet # 1.2-1E
Learner's Name Date
Competency: Resistance Measurement using VOM Test Attempt
1st 2nd 3rd

Directions: OVERALL EVALUATION

CALL INSTRUCTOR and ask Level


him/her to assess your Achie PERFORMANCE LEVELS
performance in the following ved
critical task and performance 4 - Can perform this skill without
criteria indicated below supervision and with initiative and
adaptability to problem situations.
You will be rated based on the 3 - Can perform this skill
overall evaluation outlined on satisfactorily without assistance or
the right side. supervision.
2 - Can perform this skill
satisfactorily but requires some
assistance and/or supervision.
1 - Can perform parts of this skill
satisfactorily, but requires
considerable assistance and/or
supervision.
Instructor will initial level achieved.

PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
For acceptable achievement, all items should receive a Yes No N/A
"Yes", “No” or "N/A" response.
Ohmmeter in multi-meter are identify
Functions of ohmmeterare understood
VOM is properly used
Accurate reading in ohmmeter
Safety are apply while using tools accordance to the
OH&S

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Information Sheet # 1.2-1F

LO2. IDENTIFY AND EXPLAIN THE USES/FUNCTION OF DIFFERENT


TYPES OF TOOLS, EQUIPMENT AND TESTING INSTRUMENTS

Learning Objectives: In an electronics shop scenario, the trainee will be


able to identify, explain the uses of different types of tools, and equipment
and testing instrument and their functions in assembling and disassembling
consumer electronics products and systems with-in 25 minutes.

Voltage and Current

Voltage and Current are vital to understanding electronics, but they are
quite hard to grasp because we can't see them directly.

Voltage is the Cause, Current is the Effect


Voltage attempts to make a current flow, and current will flow if the circuit
is complete. Voltage is sometimes described as the 'push' or 'force' of the
electricity, it isn't really a force but this may help you to imagine what is
happening. It is possible to have voltage without current, but current cannot
flow without voltage.

Voltage and Current No Voltage and No


Voltage but No Current
The switch is closed Current
The switch is open so the
making a complete Without the cell there
circuit is broken and
circuit so current can is no source of voltage
current cannot flow.
flow. so current cannot flow.

VOLTMETER
The voltmeter is one of the uses in V.O.M. The voltmeter is an
instrument used to measures the voltage. The unit of voltage is VOLT (V).
The voltmeter it can be an AC or DC volt. The voltmeter in AC has a several
ranges – 10 v., 50 v., 250 v, 1000 v. while the DC has a several ranges –
0.1, 0.5, 2.5, 10, 50, 250, 1000 v.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
AMPMETER
The current meter is one of the uses in V.O.M. The current meter is an
instrument used to measures the current. The unit of current is AMPERE
(A). The current meter can be DC current. The current meter in DC has a
several ranges = 0.25A, 25mA, 2.5mA, 50uA, 150mA, 10mA, 1.5mA,
150uA.

VOLTMETER AND AMPMETER


The volt & current meter scale is found in the lower part of the meter
scale below the mirror. They are read from left to right.
The volt & current meter scale is composing of major and minor scale.
Major scale is the bigger line and Minor scale is the small line.

Range in
AC Volt
Range in
DC Volt

Range in
DC Current

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
The equivalent of Major and Minor Scale in Volt & Current Meter:

Here are the formulas:

Major = Range Minor = Range


10 50

Here is the Table

Range/s Major Minor


1000 100 20
750 75 15
250 25 5
50 5 1
25 2.5 0.5
10 1 0.2
2.5 0.25 0.05
0.5 0.05 0.01
0.25 0.025 0.005
0.1 0.01 0.002

Example:

B
A C

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Pointer “A”
Range = 10 the pointer deflect at second major position.

Measured value = (Deflection Value) x (Major or Minor equivalent) = 2 x 1 = 2

Note: don’t forget the unit value; (V) volt for voltage and (A) ampere, (mA) milli-
ampere and (uA) micro-ampere for current.

Pointer “B”
Range = 25 the pointer deflect at third minor in forth major.

Major value = 4 x 2.5 = 10


Minor value = 3 x 0.5 = 1.5

So the Measured value = 10 + 1.5 = 11.5

Pointer “C” is another case of reading; every movement of the pointer will
be count so this case; the position of the pointer is not exactly in the major
and minor scale or in between the scale.
Range = 50

Major value = 6 x 5 = 30
Minor value = 2 x 1 = 2
Half Minor value = 0.5 x 1 = 0.5
So the Measured value = 30 + 2 + 0.5 = 32.5

The other way of getting the value of a certain reading by using


this formula:

Measured value = No. of scale x Range


50
Example:
Pointer “A” “Range = 10” the pointer deflect at second major position.
Measured value = 10 x 10 =100 = 2
50 50

Pointer “B” “Range = 25” the pointer deflect at third minor in forth major.
Measured value = 23 x 25 =575 = 11.5
50 50

Pointer “C” “Range = 50”


Measured value = 32.5 x 50 =1625 = 32.5
50 50
Note: don’t forget the unit value; (V) volt for voltage and (A) ampere, (mA) milli-
ampere and (uA) micro-ampere for current.
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
How to use the Voltmeter:
Voltage, V
Voltage is a measure of the energy
carried by the charge.
Strictly: voltage is the "energy per
unit charge".
The proper name for voltage is
potential difference or p.d. for
short, but this term is rarely used Connecting a voltmeter in parallel
in electronics.
Voltage is supplied by the battery (or power supply).
Voltage is used up in components, but not in wires.
We say voltage across a component.
Voltage is measured in volts, V.
Voltage is measured with a voltmeter, connected in parallel.
The symbol V is used for voltage in equations.
Voltage at a point and 0V (zero volts)
Voltage is a difference between two points,
but in electronics we often refer to voltage at a
point meaning the voltage difference between that
point and a reference point of 0V (zero volts).
Zero volts could be any point in the circuit,
but to be consistent it is normally the negative
terminal of the battery or power supply. You will
often see circuit diagrams labeled with 0V as a
reminder.
You may find it helpful to think of voltage like height in geography.
The reference point of zero height is the mean (average) sea level and all
heights are measured from that point. The zero volts in an electronic circuit
is like the mean sea level in geography.

Zero volts for circuits with a dual supply

Some circuits require a dual supply with three


supply connections as shown in the diagram. For these
circuits the zero volts reference point is the middle
terminal between the two parts of the supply.
On complex circuit diagrams using a dual supply
the earth symbol is often used to indicate a connection
to 0V, this helps to reduce the number of wires drawn on the diagram.
The diagram shows a ±9V dual supply, the positive terminal is +9V,
the negative terminal is -9V and the middle terminal is 0V.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
NOTE:
1. Always set the pointer of a voltmeter carefully to the zero resistance
point on the scale by means of the zero corrector indicators.

2. Change the batteries promptly when the meter can no longer be set to
zero.

Procedures:
1. Open the back case of the tester by using the screw driver either flat or
Philip screw driver to insert the battery then closed it.
2. Be sure that the device is connected from the power source.
3. Insert the test prods to the female receptacles of the tester, the red test
prod to the positive sign; the black test prods to the negative sign.
4. Set the indicator pointer to zero volts by adjusting the zero corrector
indicators on the scale.
5. Adjust the range selector switch to a selected range either AC or DC.
6. In measuring the AC voltage, turn the range selector switch to ACV range,
for DC voltage, turns the range selector switch to DCV range.
7. Adjust the range selector switch to the highest ranges.
8. When measuring the voltage in circuit the connection of the multi-meter
must be across the circuit or in parallel to the line to be measured.
9. By connecting the two test probe to the terminal make it sure you know
the polarity of the source of current. Connect the red test probe to the
positive side and the black test probe to the negative side.
8. Then observe the pointer where it is stop and read the measured value.
9. When the reading is unclear you may adjust the selector range one step
down to make it clear the reading.

How to use the Current meter:


Current, I

Current is the rate of flow of charge.


Current is not used up, what flows into
a component must flow out.
We say current through a component.
Current is measured in amps
(amperes), A.
Current is measured with an ammeter,
connected in series.
To connect in series you must break
the circuit and put the ammeter across
the gap, as shown in the diagram.
The symbol I is used for current in
equations.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
1A (1 amp) is quite a large current for electronics, so mA (milliamps)
are often used. m (milli) means "thousandth":

1mA = 0.001A, or 1000mA = 1A

The need to break the circuit to connect in series means that


ammeters are difficult to use on soldered circuits. Most testing in electronics
is done with voltmeters which can be easily connected without disturbing
circuits.

NOTE:

1. Always set the pointer of a voltmeter carefully to the zero


resistance point on the scale by means of the zero corrector
indicators.

2. Change the batteries promptly when the meter can no longer be


set to zero.

Procedures:
1. Open the back case of the tester by using the screw driver either flat or
Philip screw driver to insert the battery then closed it.
2. Be sure that the device is connected from the power source.
3. Insert the test prods to the female receptacles of the tester, the red test
probe to the positive sign, and the black test probe to the negative sign.
4. Set the indicator pointer to zero volts by adjusting the zero corrector
indicators on the scale.
5. Adjust the range selector switch to a selected range DC current.
6. Adjust the range selector switch to the highest ranges.
7. When measuring the current in circuit the connection of the multi-meter
must be within the circuit or in series so that you may cut the line to be
measured.
8. Then connect the two test probe to the cut line in series make it sure you
know the polarity of the source of current. Connect the red test probe to the
positive side and the black test probe to the negative side.
8. Then observe the pointer where it is stop and read the measured value.
9. When the reading is unclear you may adjust the selector range one step
down to make it clear the reading.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Self-Check #1.2-1F

LO1. MEASURING THE VOLTAGE AND CURRENT USING VOLTMETER


AND AMPMETER

Multiple Choices: Choose the correct letters that best describe the
statement. Write your answers in capital letter on your answer sheet.

1. The Volt Amp meter scale compose of big line and small line;
that is called:
A. Major and Minor Scale
B. Minor Scale
C. Major Scale
D. Scale

2. Using Volt Amp meter the measured value of the voltage is


result of;
A. Major and minor scale
B. Reading on scale
C. Range
D. The product of No. of scale and Range divide by 50

3. The small line in a meter scale of the Volt Amp meter is called.
A. Major and Minor Scale
B. Minor Scale
C. Major Scale
D. Scale

4. The connection of the Volt meter in circuit must be.


A. Wire connection
B. Series Parallel
C. Parallel
D. Series

5. The connection of the Amp meter in circuit must be.


A. Wire connection
B. Series Parallel
C. Parallel
D. Series

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
ANSWER KEY #1.2-1F
Self-Check of #1.2-1F

LO1. MEASURING THE VOLTAGE AND CURRENT USING VOLTMETER


AND AMPMETER

1. A
2. D
3. B
4. C
5. D

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
TASK SHEET 1.2-1F

Title: Voltage and Current Measurement

Performance Objective: The trainee must be able to measure the voltage and
current in the circuit.

Supplies/Materials : Paper and Ball pen, resistor (assorted) 10pcs.

Equipment : Multi-meter, bread board and cell phone charger.

Steps/Procedure:

a. Prepared the following materials.


b. Arrange the resistor by numbering from 1 to 10.
c. Measured the resistance of each resistor and record to table A.
d. Construct the circuit according to their diagram.
e. Compute the missing value.
f. Measure the resistance in circuit with-out any supply and
record the measured value in table B.
g. Connect the charger into the circuit and measure the Voltage
and Current and record the measured value in table B.
Table A.
Resistor No. Measure Value
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
R9
R10

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Table B. Measured Resistance, Voltage and Current
Measured Measured Measured
Resistor Voltage Current
Value Value Value
No. No. No.
(Resistance) (Voltage) (Current)
R1 V1 I1
R2 V2 I2
R3 V3 I3
R4 V4 I4
R5 V5 I5
RT VT IT
(Series) (Series) (Series)
R6 R6 I6
R7 R7 I7
R8 R8 I8
R9 R9 I9
R10 R10 I10
RT VT IT
(Parallel) (Parallel) (Parallel)

Diagramming:
Series
+ R1 R2
RT R3
-

R5 R4

Parallel

+
RT R6 R7 R8 R9 R10
-

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
VI. Computation:
Compute the
following;
Series Parallel
RT V1 I1 RT V6 I6
IT V2 I2 IT V7 I7
V3 I3 V8 I8
V4 I4 V9 I9
V5 I5 V10 I10

Assessment Method:

Demonstration, Evaluate Using Performance criteria checklist

Performance Criteria Checklist


Task Sheet #1.2-1F

CRITERIA YES NO
Did I..
1. Explain the function of volt amp meter in multi-meter.
2. Read the voltage using voltmeter?
3. Read the current using amp meter?
4. Safety precautions and procedures observed?

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
PERFORMANCE TEST

Learner's Name Date


Competency: Voltage and Current Measurement Test Attempt
using VOM 1st 2nd 3rd

Directions: OVERALL EVALUATION

CALL INSTRUCTOR and ask Level


him/her to assess your Achie PERFORMANCE LEVELS
performance in the following ved
critical task and performance 4 - Can perform this skill without
criteria indicated below supervision and with initiative and
adaptability to problem situations.
You will be rated based on the 3 - Can perform this skill
overall evaluation outlined on satisfactorily without assistance or
the right side. supervision.
2 - Can perform this skill
satisfactorily but requires some
assistance and/or supervision.
1 - Can perform parts of this skill
satisfactorily, but requires
considerable assistance and/or
supervision.
Instructor will initial level achieved.

PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
For acceptable achievement, all items should receive a Yes No N/A
"Yes", “No” or "N/A" response.
Voltmeter and Amp meter in multi-meter are identify
Functions of volt and amp meter are understood
VOM is properly used
Accurate reading in volt and amp meter
Safety are apply while using tools accordance to the
OH&S

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Learning Outcome #3 Identify electronics symbols and interpret
schematic diagrams and part list.

CONTENTS:
Electronic devices and symbols
Resistor and capacitor color codes
Classes and types of electronic parts/devices
Drawing and interpreting schematic diagrams

CONDITIONS:
Students/trainees must be provided with the following:
Drawing instruments and materials
Working area/bench
Sufficient lighting and ventilation system
Complete electronic supplies

EQUIPMENT TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES


● OHP ● T-square
● TV, LCD ● Ruler
● Working Table ● Triangle Ruler
●30/60 Triangle
●Technical Pen

SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LEARNING MATERIALS


●Oslo Paper ● Handouts
●Eraser ● Paper-based assessment form.
● Drawing materials Assessment record book.
Visual Aids
Related textbooks
CDs for related film show
CBLM

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
METHODOLOGIES: ASSESSMENT METHODS:
● Demonstration Return demonstration
Research work Oral and written examinations /
Role-playing Paper and Pen Test
Direct Observation/ Interview
Practical examination

Learning Experiences

Learning Outcome 3

DETERMINE LEARNER’S TRAINING REQUIREMENTS

Learning Activities Special Instructions


1. Read Information Sheet # 1.3-1
On Identify electronics symbols and
interpret schematic diagrams and parts
list(Wires and connections, Power
Supplies, Output Devices and
Switches)
2. Answer Self-Check # 1.3-1 Compare answer with Answer Key
3. Read Information Sheet # 1.3-
1A(Resistors, Capacitor, Diode and
Transistor)
4. Answer Self-Check # 1.3-1A Compare answer with Answer Key
5. Read Information Sheet # 1.3-
1B(Audio and Radio Devices, Meter
and Oscilloscope, and Sensor)
6. Answer Self-Check # 1.3-1B Compare answer with Answer Key

7. Read Information Sheet # 1.3-1C(A)


8. Answer Self-Check # 1.3-1C Compare answer with Answer Key

9. Read Information Sheet # 1.3-1D(A)


10. Answer Self-Check # 1.3-1D Compare answer with Answer Key

11. Read Information Sheet # 1.3-


1E(A)
12. Answer Self-Check # 1.3-1E Compare answer with Answer Key

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
13. Read Information Sheet # 1.3-
1F(A)
14. Answer Self-Check # 1.3-1F Compare answer with Answer Key

15. Read Information Sheet # 1.3-


1G(A)
16. Answer Self-Check # 1.3-1G Compare answer with Answer Key

17. Read Information Sheet # 1.3-


1H(A)
18. Answer Self-Check # 1.3-1H Compare answer with Answer Key

19. Read Information Sheet # 1.3-1I(A)


20. Answer Self-Check # 1.3-1I Compare answer with Answer Key

21. Read Information Sheet # 1.3-


1J(A)
22. Answer Self-Check # 1.3-1J Compare answer with Answer Key

23. Read Information Sheet # 1.3-


1K(A)
24. Answer Self-Check # 1.3-1K Compare answer with Answer Key

25. Read Information Sheet # 1.3-


1L(A)
26. Answer Self-Check # 1.3-1L Compare answer with Answer Key

27. Perform Task Sheet # 1.3-1 Evaluate Using Performance criteria


checklist
28. Watch Video Clips This video clips will identify the
specific endangerments sites for the
trainee to apply safety and precaution
on these sites.

After doing all the activities of this


LO, you are ready to proceed to the
next LO on discuss the treatment
strategy with the client/patient.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Information Sheet # 1.3-1

LO3. IDENTIFY ELECTRONIC SYMBOLS AND INTERPRET SCHEMATIC


DIAGRAMS AND PARTS LIST

Learning Objectives: In an electronics shop scenario, the trainee will be able


to identify, explain the uses of different types of tools, and equipment and
testing instrument and their functions in assembling and disassembling
consumer electronics products and systems with-in 25 minutes.

Circuit Symbols

Wires | Supplies | Output devices | Switches |


Circuit symbols are used in circuit diagrams which show how a circuit is
connected together. The actual layout of the components is usually quite
different from the circuit diagram. To build a circuit you need a different
diagram showing the layout of the parts on strip board or printed circuit board.

Wires and connections


Component Circuit Symbol Function of Component
To pass current very easily from one
Wire
part of a circuit to another.
A 'blob' should be drawn where wires
are connected (joined), but it is
sometimes omitted. Wires connected
Wires joined
at 'crossroads' should be staggered
slightly to form two T-junctions, as
shown on the right.
In complex diagrams it is often
necessary to draw wires crossing
even though they are not connected. I
Wires not prefer the 'bridge' symbol shown on
joined the right because the simple crossing
on the left may be misread as a join
where you have forgotten to add a
'blob'!

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Power Supplies
Component Circuit Symbol Function of Component
Supplies electrical energy.
The larger terminal (on the left) is
positive (+).
Cell
A single cell is often called a battery,
but strictly a battery is two or more
cells joined together.
Supplies electrical energy. A battery is
more than one cell.
Battery
The larger terminal (on the left) is
positive (+).
Supplies electrical energy.
DC supply DC = Direct Current, always flowing in
one direction.
Supplies electrical energy.
AC supply AC = Alternating Current, continually
changing direction.
A safety device which will 'blow' (melt)
Fuse if the current flowing through it
exceeds a specified value.
Two coils of wire linked by an iron
core. Transformers are used to step up
(increase) and step down (decrease) AC
Transformer voltages. Energy is transferred between
the coils by the magnetic field in the
core. There is no electrical connection
between the coils.
A connection to earth. For many
electronic circuits this is the 0V (zero
Earth volts) of the power supply, but for
(Ground) mains electricity and some radio
circuits it really means the earth. It is
also known as ground.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Output Devices: Lamps, Heater, Motor, etc.
Component Circuit Symbol Function of Component
A transducer which converts
electrical energy to light. This
symbol is used for a lamp
Lamp (lighting)
providing illumination, for
example a car headlamp or
torch bulb.
A transducer which converts
electrical energy to light. This
symbol is used for a lamp
Lamp (indicator)
which is an indicator, for
example a warning light on a
car dashboard.
A transducer which converts
Heater
electrical energy to heat.
A transducer which converts
Motor electrical energy to kinetic
energy (motion).

A transducer which converts


Bell
electrical energy to sound.

A transducer which converts


Buzzer
electrical energy to sound.

A coil of wire which creates a


magnetic field when current
passes through it. It may have
Inductor an iron core inside the coil. It
(Coil, Solenoid) can be used as a transducer
converting electrical energy to
mechanical energy by pulling
on something.
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Switches
Component Circuit Symbol Function of Component
A push switch allows
current to flow only when
Push Switch
the button is pressed. This
(push-to-make)
is the switch used to
operate a doorbell.
This type of push switch is
normally closed (on), it is
Push-to-Break Switch
open (off) only when the
button is pressed.
SPST = Single Pole, Single
Throw.
On-Off Switch An on-off switch allows
(SPST) current to flow only when it
is in the closed (on)
position.
SPDT = Single Pole, Double
Throw.
A 2-way changeover switch
directs the flow of current
2-way Switch
to one of two routes
(SPDT)
according to its position.
Some SPDT switches have
a central off position and
are described as 'on-off-on'.
DPST = Double Pole, Single
Throw.
A dual on-off switch which
Dual On-Off Switch
is often used to switch
(DPST)
mains electricity because it
can isolate both the live
and neutral connections.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
DPDT = Double Pole,
Double Throw.
This switch can be wired
Reversing Switch
up as a reversing switch for
(DPDT)
a motor. Some DPDT
switches have a central off
position.
An electrically operated
switch, for example a 9V
battery circuit connected to
the coil can switch a 230V
Relay
AC mains circuit.
NO = Normally Open,
COM = Common,
NC = Normally Closed.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Self-Check #1.3-1

LO3. IDENTIFY ELECTRONIC SYMBOLS AND INTERPRET SCHEMATIC


DIAGRAMS AND PARTS LIST

Multiple Choices: Choose the correct letter that best describes the statement.
Write your answers in capital letter on your answer sheet.

1. When draw a wire connect we are considering this:


A. Blob
B. Bridge
C. Cross Line
D. Loop

2. This symbol composes of series of cells.


A. AC Supply
B. Battery
C. Cell
D. DC Supply

3. This symbol is used in forward and reverse of motor.


A. DPDT
B. DPST
C. SPDT
D. SPST

4. This is transducers that convert electrical energy into a light used to


indicate.
A. Buzzer
B. Indicator
C. Lighting
D. Motor

5. This is a protecting device that would be cut-off the supply when the
current increase.
A. Capacitor
B. Coil
C. Fuse
D. Resistor
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
ANSWER KEY #1.3-1
Self-Check of #1.3-1

LO3. IDENTIFY ELECTRONIC SYMBOLS AND INTERPRET SCHEMATIC


DIAGRAMS AND PARTS LIST

1. A
2. B
3. A
4. B
5. C

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Information Sheet # 1.3-1A

LO3. IDENTIFY ELECTRONIC SYMBOLS AND INTERPRET SCHEMATIC


DIAGRAMS AND PARTS LIST

Learning Objectives: In an electronics shop scenario, the trainee will be able


to identify, explain the uses of different types of tools, and equipment and
testing instrument and their functions in assembling and disassembling
consumer electronics products and systems with-in 25 minutes.

Circuit Symbols
Resistors | Capacitors | Diodes | Transistors | Audio & Radio | Meters |
Sensors |

Resistors
Component Circuit Symbol Function of Component
A resistor restricts the flow of
current, for example to limit
the current passing through
an LED. A resistor is used
Resistor with a capacitor in a timing
circuit.
Some publications still use
the old resistor symbol:

This type of variable resistor


with 2 contacts (a rheostat)
is usually used to control
current. Examples include:
Variable Resistor
adjusting lamp brightness,
(Rheostat)
adjusting motor speed, and
adjusting the rate of flow of
charge into a capacitor in a
timing circuit.
This type of variable resistor
Variable Resistor
with 3 contacts (a
(Potentiometer)
potentiometer) is usually

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
used to control voltage. It
can be used like this as a
transducer converting
position (angle of the control
spindle) to an electrical
signal.
This type of variable resistor
(a preset) is operated with a
small screwdriver or similar
tool. It is designed to be set
when the circuit is made and
Variable Resistor
then left without further
(Preset)
adjustment. Presets are
cheaper than normal
variable resistors so they are
often used in projects to
reduce the cost.

Capacitors
Component Circuit Symbol Function of Component
A capacitor stores electric
charge. A capacitor is used
with a resistor in a timing
Capacitor
circuit. It can also be used
as a filter, to block DC
signals but pass AC signals.
A capacitor stores electric
charge. This type must be
connected the correct way
round. A capacitor is used
Capacitor, polarized
with a resistor in a timing
circuit. It can also be used
as a filter, to block DC
signals but pass AC signals.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
A variable capacitor is used
Variable Capacitor
in a radio tuner.

This type of variable


capacitor (a trimmer) is
operated with a small
screwdriver or similar tool.
Trimmer Capacitor
It is designed to be set when
the circuit is made and then
left without further
adjustment.

Diodes
Component Circuit Symbol Function of Component
A device which only allows
Diode current to flow in one
direction.
A transducer which
LED
converts electrical energy
Light Emitting Diode
to light.
A special diode which is
used to maintain a fixed
ZENER Diode
voltage across its
terminals.

Photodiode A light-sensitive diode.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Transistors
Component Circuit Symbol Function of Component

A transistor amplifies current. It can


be used with other components to
Transistor NPN
make an amplifier or switching
circuit.

A transistor amplifies current. It can


be used with other components to
Transistor PNP
make an amplifier or switching
circuit.

Phototransistor A light-sensitive transistor.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Self-Check #1.3-1A

LO3. IDENTIFY ELECTRONIC SYMBOLS AND INTERPRET SCHEMATIC


DIAGRAMS AND PARTS LIST

Multiple Choices: Choose the correct letter that best describes the statement.
Write your answers in capital letter on your answer sheet.

1. A transducer that convert electrical energy into a light:


A. Diode
B. Light Emitting Diode
C. Photo Diode
D. ZENER Diode

2. A type of transistor used as sensor.


A. JFET Transistor
B. NPN Transistor
C. Photo Transistor
D. PNP Transistor

3. This component can hold electrical charge.


A. Capacitor
B. Diode
C. Resistor
D. Transistor

4. This component can oppose the flow of current.


A. Capacitor
B. Diode
C. Resistor
D. Transistor

5. A type of diode used as sensor.


A. Diode
B. Light Emitting Diode
C. Photo Diode
D. ZENER Diode

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
ANSWER KEY #1.3-1A
Self-Check of #1.3-1A

LO3. IDENTIFY ELECTRONIC SYMBOLS AND INTERPRET SCHEMATIC


DIAGRAMS AND PARTS LIST

1. B
2. C
3. A
4. C
5. C

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Information Sheet # 1.3-1B

LO3. IDENTIFY ELECTRONIC SYMBOLS AND INTERPRET SCHEMATIC


DIAGRAMS AND PARTS LIST

Learning Objectives: In an electronics shop scenario, the trainee will be able


to identify, explain the uses of different types of tools, and equipment and
testing instrument and their functions in assembling and disassembling
consumer electronics products and systems with-in 25 minutes.

Audio and Radio Devices


Component Circuit Symbol Function of Component

A transducer which converts sound


Microphone
to electrical energy.

A transducer which converts


Earphone
electrical energy to sound.

A transducer which converts


Loudspeaker
electrical energy to sound.

A transducer which converts


Piezo Transducer
electrical energy to sound.

An amplifier circuit with one input.


Amplifier Really it is a block diagram symbol
(general symbol) because it represents a circuit
rather than just one component.

A device which is designed to


Aerial
receive or transmit radio signals. It
(Antenna)
is also known as an antenna.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Meters and Oscilloscope
Component Circuit Symbol Function of Component
A voltmeter is used to measure voltage.
The proper name for voltage is
Voltmeter
'potential difference', but most people
prefer to say voltage!

An ammeter is used to measure


Ammeter
current.

A galvanometer is a very sensitive


Galvanometer meter which is used to measure tiny
currents, usually 1mA or less.
An ohmmeter is used to measure
Ohmmeter resistance. Most multi-meters have an
ohmmeter setting.
An oscilloscope is used to display the
shape of electrical signals and it can
Oscilloscope
be used to measure their voltage and
time period.

Sensors (input devices)


Component Circuit Symbol Function of Component
A transducer which converts brightness
(light) to resistance (an electrical
LDR
property).
LDR = Light Dependent Resistor
A transducer which converts
Thermistor temperature (heat) to resistance (an
electrical property).

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Self-Check #1.3-1B

LO3. IDENTIFY ELECTRONIC SYMBOLS AND INTERPRET SCHEMATIC


DIAGRAMS AND PARTS LIST

Multiple Choices: Choose the correct letter that best describes the statement.
Write your answers in capital letter on your answer sheet.

1. This component is a light sensitive whose varied there resistance:


A. Light Dependent Resistor
B. Photo Diode
C. Photo Transistor
D. Thermistor

2. This component is transducers that convert electrical energy into real


sound.
A. Bell
B. Buzzer
C. Loudspeaker
D. Microphone

3. These electronic symbols that can measured small amount of current.


A. Ammeter
B. Galvanometer
C. Ohmmeter
D. Voltmeter

4. These symbols that indicate that is a device that would be receive


signal.
A. Amplifier
B. Antenna
C. Microphone
D. Oscilloscope

5. This symbol is a transducer that converts sound into electrical


energy.
A. Amplifier
B. Antenna
C. Microphone
D. Oscilloscope

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
ANSWER KEY #1.3-1B
Self-Check of #1.3-1B

LO3. IDENTIFY ELECTRONIC SYMBOLS AND INTERPRET SCHEMATIC


DIAGRAMS AND PARTS LIST

1. A
2. C
3. B
4. B
5. C

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
TASK SHEET 1.3-1B
Title: Draw and interpret the different electronics symbols

Performance Objective: The trainee must be able draw and identify the
different electronics symbols and interpret it in 5
minutes following the prescribed format.
Supplies/Materials : Pencil, Paper

Equipment : Ruler and other drawing materials

Steps/Procedure:

1. Prepare the supplies and equipment.


2. On table A below, draw the required symbol of each block.
3. TABLE A: Electronics Symbol.

DPDT AND Gate Relay Wire Resistor


Switch

Polarized PNP Trimmer Variable NPN


Capacitor Transistor Capacitor Capacitor Transistor

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Diode Buzzer Loudspeaker LED Transformer

Wire joined Battery DC supply Zener Diode AC Supply

Assessment Method:

Demonstration, Evaluate Using Performance criteria checklist

Performance Criteria Checklist


Task Sheet #1.3-1B

CRITERIA YES NO
Did I..
1. Identify the following different Electronics Symbols?
a. Resistor
b. Capacitor
c. Transistor
d. Wire and Wire connected
e. Source
f. Input and Output
g. Sensor
h. Meter
i. Audio and Radio Devices
2. Apply safety precautions and procedures observed?

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
PERFORMANCE TEST

Learner's Name Date


Competency: Identification of different tools and Test Attempt
their function 1st 2nd 3rd

Directions: OVERALL EVALUATION

CALL INSTRUCTOR and ask Level


him/her to assess your Achie PERFORMANCE LEVELS
performance in the following ved
critical task and performance 4 - Can perform this skill without
criteria indicated below supervision and with initiative and
adaptability to problem situations.
You will be rated based on the 3 - Can perform this skill
overall evaluation outlined on satisfactorily without assistance or
the right side. supervision.
2 - Can perform this skill
satisfactorily but requires some
assistance and/or supervision.
1 - Can perform parts of this skill
satisfactorily, but requires
considerable assistance and/or
supervision.
Instructor will initial level achieved.

PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
For acceptable achievement, all items should receive a Yes No N/A
"Yes"or "N/A" response.
Electronics components/symbols are identified
Functions of different electronics components/symbols
are understood
Electronics components/symbols properly interpret
Draw the different electronics symbols

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Information Sheet # 1.3-1C

LO3. IDENTIFY ELECTRONIC SYMBOLS AND INTERPRET SCHEMATIC


DIAGRAMS AND PARTS LIST

Learning Objectives: In an electronics shop scenario, the trainee will be able


to explain the relationship of the between Voltage, Current and Resistance
in the circuits with-in 25 minutes.

Ohm's Law

Ohm's law is the most important, basic law of electricity. It defines the
relationship between the three fundamental electrical quantities: current,
voltage, and resistance. When a voltage is applied to a circuit containing only
resistive elements, current flows according to Ohm's Law, which is shown
below.

• I=V/R
• Where: I = Electrical Current (Amperes) V = Voltage (Voltage) R =
Resistance (Ohms)

Ohm's law states that the electrical current (I) flowing in a circuit is
proportional to the voltage (V) and inversely proportional to the resistance (R).

Therefore, if the voltage is increased, the current will increase provided the
resistance of the circuit does not change. Similarly, increasing the resistance of
the circuit will lower the current flow if the voltage is not changed.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
To make a current flow through a resistance there must be a voltage across
that resistance. Ohm's Law shows the relationship between the voltage (V),
current (I) and resistance (R). It can be written in three ways:

V V
V=I×R or I= or R=
R I

where: V = voltage in volts (V) or: V = voltage in volts (V)


I = current in amps (A) I = current in milliamps (mA)
R = resistance in ohms ( ) R = resistance in kilohms (k )

For most electronic circuits the amp is too large and the ohm is too small, so
we often measure current in milliamps (mA) and resistance in kilohms (k ). 1
mA = 0.001 A and 1 k = 1000 .

The Ohm's Law equations work if you use V, A and , or if you use V, mA and
k . You must not mix these sets of units in the equations so you may need to
convert between mA and A or k and .

The VIR triangle

You can use the VIR triangle to help you remember the three
versions of Ohm's Law. V
Write down V, I and R in a triangle like the one in the yellow box
on the right. I R

To calculate voltage, V: put your finger over V,


this leaves you with I R, so the equation is V = I × R Ohm's Law
To calculate current, I: put your finger over I, triangle
this leaves you with V over R, so the equation is I = V/R
To calculate resistance, R: put your finger over R,
this leaves you with V over I, so the equation is R = V/I

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Ohm's Law Calculations

Use this method to guide you through calculations:


1. Write down the Values, converting units if necessary.
2. Select the Equation you need (use the VIR triangle). V
3. Put the Numbers into the equation and calculate the answer.
I R
It should be Very Easy Now!

3 V is applied across a 6 resistor, what is the current?

o Values: V = 3 V, I = ?, R = 6
o Equation: I = V/R
o Numbers: Current, I = 3/6 = 0.5 A

A lamp connected to a 6 V battery passes a current of 60 mA, what is the


lamp's resistance?

o Values: V = 6 V, I = 60 mA, R = ?
o Equation: R = V/I
o Numbers: Resistance, R = 6/60 = 0.1 k = 100
(using mA for current means the calculation gives the resistance in k
)

A 1.2 k resistor passes a current of 0.2 A, what is the voltage across


it?

o Values: V = ?, I = 0.2 A, R = 1.2 k = 1200


(1.2 k is converted to 1200 because A and k must not be used
together)
o Equation: V = I × R
o Numbers: V = 0.2 × 1200 = 240 V

What is power?

Power is the rate of using or supplying energy:


Energy Power is measured in watts (W)
Power = Time Energy is measured in joules (J)
Time is measured in seconds (s)

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Electronics is mostly concerned with small quantities of power, so the power is
often measured in milliwatts (mW), 1mW = 0.001W. For example an LED uses
about 40mW and a bleeper uses about 100mW, even a lamp such as a torch
bulb only uses about 1W.

The typical power used in mains electrical circuits is much larger, so this
power may be measured in kilowatts (kW), 1kW = 1000W. For example a
typical mains lamp uses 60W and a kettle uses about 3kW.

Calculating power using current and voltage

There are three ways of writing an equation for power, current and voltage:
P P
Power = Current × Voltage so P = I × V or I= or V=
V I

where: P = power in watts (W) or: P = power in milliwatts (mW) P


V = voltage in volts (V) V = voltage in volts (V)
I = current in amps (A) I = current in milliamps (mA) I V

You can use the PIV triangle to help you remember the three versions of the
power equations. Use it in the same way as the Ohm's Law triangle. For most
electronic circuits the amp is too large, so we often measure current in
milliamps (mA) and power in milliwatts (mW). 1mA = 0.001A and 1mW =
0.001W.

Calculating power using resistance and current or voltage

Using Ohm's Law V = I × R we can


convert P = I × V to:
P V²
P = I² × where: P = power in watts (W)
R I = current in amps I² R P R
or (A)
P = V² / R = resistance in ohms PI²R triangle V²PR triangle
R ( )
V = voltage in volts (V)

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Self-Check #1.3-1C

LO3. IDENTIFY ELECTRONIC SYMBOLS AND INTERPRET SCHEMATIC


DIAGRAMS AND PARTS LIST

Multiple Choices: Choose the correct letters that best describe the statement.
Write your answers in capital letter on your answer sheet.

1. This are stating the relationship of voltage, current and resistance in


circuit:
A. Voltage Law
B. Current Law
C. Resistance Law
D. Ohms Law
2. The rate of using energy or supplying energy.
A. Voltage
B. Current
C. Resistance
D. Power

3. Ohms Law states that the current is directly proportional to the


___________ and inversely proportional to the resistance.
A. Voltage
B. Current
C. Resistance
D. Power

4. In getting the unknown value of the resistance is:


A. Voltage multiplied by Current
B. Voltage divide by Current
C. Current divide by Voltage
D. Voltage multiplied by Power

5. In getting the unknown value of Power is:


A. Voltage divide by Current
B. Voltage multiplied by Current
C. Voltage multiplied by Resistance
D. Voltage divide by Resistance

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
ANSWER KEY #1.3-1C
Self-Check of #1.3-1C

LO3. IDENTIFY ELECTRONIC SYMBOLS AND INTERPRET SCHEMATIC


DIAGRAMS AND PARTS LIST

1. D
2. D
3. A
4. B
5. B

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
TASK SHEET 1.3-1C
Title: Ohms Law.

Performance Objective: The trainee must be able to apply the


computation of the unknown value in the circuit
through Ohms Law.
Supplies/Materials : Paper and Ball pen

Equipment : Calculator

Steps/Procedure:

Analyze carefully the following giving problem and compute the unknown
value.
1. Apply the operation of Ohms Law to the problem.

2. A neon bulb connected to a 12 V battery passes a current of 30


mA, what is the neon bulb’s resistance?

3. The voltage applied is 10 V is across a 12 resistor, what is the


current?

4. A load having a 2.7 k resistance passes a current of 0.5 A, what


is the voltage across it?

5. A bulb connected to a 220 V outlet with a resistance of 12 .


Assessment Method:

Demonstration, Evaluate Using Performance criteria checklist


Performance Criteria Checklist
Task Sheet #1.3-1C

CRITERIA YES NO
Did I..
1. Explain the relationship of voltage current and resistance?
2. Compute the unknown value of the in the circuit?
3. Safety precautions and procedures observed?
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Information Sheet # 1.3-1D

LO3. IDENTIFY ELECTRONIC SYMBOLS AND INTERPRET SCHEMATIC


DIAGRAMS AND PARTS LIST

Learning Objectives: In an electronics shop scenario, the trainee will be able


to identify, explain the uses of different types of tools, and equipment and
testing instrument and their functions in assembling and disassembling
consumer electronics products and systems with-in 25 minutes.

Electricity and the Electron

What is electricity?

Electricity is the flow of charge around a


circuit carrying energy from the battery (or power
supply) to components such as lamps and motors.

Electricity can flow only if there is a


complete circuit from the battery through wires
to components and back to the battery again.

The diagram shows a simple circuit of a


battery, wires, a switch and a lamp. The switch
works by breaking the circuit.

With the switch open the circuit is broken - so electricity cannot flow
and the lamp is off.

With the switch closed the circuit is complete - allowing electricity to


flow and the lamp is on. The electricity is carrying energy from the battery to
the lamp.
We can see, hear or feel the effects of electricity flowing such as lamp lighting, a
bell ringing, or a motor turning - but we cannot see the electricity itself, so
which way is it flowing?

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Which way does electricity flow?

We say that electricity flows from the positive


(+) terminal of a battery to the negative (-) terminal
of the battery. We can imagine particles with
positive electric charge flowing in this direction
around the circuit, like the red dots in the
diagram.
This flow of electric charge is called
conventional current. Imaginary positive particles
This direction of flow is used throughout moving in the direction of
electronics and it is the one you should remember the conventional current
and use to understand the operation of circuits.
However this is not the whole answer because the particles that move in
fact have negative charge! And they flow in the opposite direction! Please read
on...

The electron

When electricity was discovered scientists tried


many experiments to find out which way the electricity
was flowing around circuits, but in those early days
they found it was impossible to find the direction of
flow.
They knew there were two types of electric charge,
positive (+) and negative (-), and they decided to say that
electricity was a flow of positive charge from + to -. They
knew this was a guess, but a decision had to be made!
Everything known at that time could also be explained if
electricity was negative charge flowing the other way,
from - to +.
The electron was discovered in 1897 and it was
found to have a negative charge. The guess made in the early days of electricity
was wrong! Electricity in almost all conductors is really the flow of electrons
(negative charge) from - to +.
By the time the electron was discovered the idea of electricity flowing from + to
- (conventional current) was firmly established. Luckily it is not a problem to
think of electricity in this way because positive charge flowing forwards is
equivalent to negative charge flowing backwards.
To prevent confusion you should always use conventional current
when trying to understand how circuits work, imagine positively charged
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
particles flowing from + to -.

Circuit Diagrams

Circuit diagrams show


how electronic
components are
connected together.
Each component is
represented by a
symbol and a few are
shown here, for other symbols please see the Circuit Symbols

Basic Composition of a Circuit

Basic circuit is composing of Source, Switch, Path


and Load.

Source – The first part of an electrical circuit is an Switch


electrical energy source. The starting point of energy that
produces electricity; like generators, large power station
and small energy produce by cell, battery and others Source
Load
Path – The second part of an electrical circuit is a very
important one: the conductors. This will serve as the
path way of the electron that would be freely to flow. Path

Load – The electrical load is the third part of an electrical circuit and is
basically a device that uses electricity. For example this computer, your TV,
your lights, fans, heaters and other devices that use electricity are all
considered "electrical load" devices.

Switch –the last part of an electrical circuit is the switch. An electrical switch
can control the electrical current by opening or closing. Opening an electrical
switch causes the energy source to be interrupted until the switch is once
again closed.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Circuit diagrams and component
layouts
Circuit diagrams show the connections
as clearly as possible with all wires
drawn neatly as straight lines. The
actual layout of the components is
usually quite different from the circuit
diagram and this can be confusing for
the beginner. The secret is to
concentrate on the connections, not the
actual positions of components.

A circuit diagram is useful when testing


a circuit and for understanding how it
works. This is why the instructions for
projects include a circuit diagram as well
as the strip board or printed circuit
board layout which you need to build
the circuit.

Drawing circuit diagrams

Drawing circuit diagrams is not difficult but it takes a


little practice to draw neat, clear diagrams. This is a
useful skill for science as well as for electronics. You
will certainly need to draw circuit diagrams if you
design your own circuits.
Follow these tips for best results:
Make sure you use the correct symbol for each
component.
Draw connecting wires as straight lines (use a
ruler).
Put a 'blob' ( ) at each junction between wires.
Label components such as resistors and
capacitors with their values.
The positive (+) supply should be at the top and
the negative (-) supply at the bottom. The
negative supply is usually labeled 0V, zero volts.
If you are drawing the circuit diagram for science
please see the section about drawing diagrams the 'electronicsway'.
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
If the circuit is complex:

Try to arrange the diagram so that signals flow from left to right: inputs
and controls should be on the left, outputs on the right.
You may omit the battery or power supply symbols, but you must
include (and label) the supply lines at the
top and bottom.

Drawing circuit diagrams the 'electronics way'

Circuit diagrams for electronics are drawn with


the positive (+) supply at the top and the
negative (-) supply at the bottom. This can be
helpful in understanding the operation of the
circuit because the voltage decreases as you
move down the circuit diagram.

Circuit diagrams for science are traditionally


drawn with the battery or power supply at the
top. This is not wrong, but there is usually no
advantage in drawing them this way and I think
it is less helpful for understanding the circuit.

Note that the negative supply is usually called 0V (zero volts).

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Self-Check #1.3-1D

LO1. ANALYZE AND INTERPRET CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

Multiple Choices: Choose the correct letters that best describe the statement.
Write your answers in capital letter on your answer sheet.

2. The parts of a basic circuit that is basically a device that uses


electricity.
E. Source
F. Switch
G. Load
H. Path

3. This show how electronic components are connected together.


A. Drawing
B. Electronics Symbols
C. Block diagram
D. Circuit diagram

4. This is a negatively charge.


A. Proton
B. Electricity
C. Electron
D. Neutron

5. This the starting point of energy.


A. Source
B. Switch
C. Load
D. Path

6. This is the flow of charge around a circuit carrying energy from the
battery to components such as lamps and motors.
A. Proton
B. Electricity
C. Electron
D. Neutron
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
ANSWER KEY #1.3-1D
Self-Check of #1.3-1D

LO1. ANALYZE AND INTERPRET CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

1. C
2. D
3. C
4. A
5. B

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
TASK SHEET 1.3-1D

Title: Circuit Diagramming

Performance Objective: The trainee must be able to construct simple


circuits.

Supplies/Materials : Paper and Ball pen

Equipment : Breadboard, Light Emitting Diode (LED),


Switch, Solid Wire and battery

Steps/Procedure: Figure 1

1. Prepared the supplies and material.


Switch
2. On your bread board construct the
simple circuit as shown in figure 1.
3. Insert first the LED component with a 330Ω
resistor with value of 330Ω. Then connect
the switch and battery.
4. When turning “ON” the switch the LED LED
must be light “ON”
Assessment Method:

Demonstration, Evaluate Using Performance criteria checklist

Performance Criteria Checklist


Task Sheet #1.3-1D

CRITERIA YES NO
Did I..
1. Interpret the Electricity?
2. Construct a simple circuit?
3. Safety precautions and procedures observed?

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Information Sheet # 1.3-1E

LO3. IDENTIFY ELECTRONIC SYMBOLS AND INTERPRET SCHEMATIC


DIAGRAMS AND PARTS LIST

Learning Objectives: In an electronics shop scenario, the trainee will be able


to explain the relationship of the between Voltage, Current and Resistance
in the circuits with-in 25 minutes.

Series and Parallel Connections

Connecting Components

There are two ways of connecting components:


In series

So that each component has the same current.

The battery voltage is divided between the two lamps


Each lamp will have half the battery voltage if the
lamps are identical.
In parallel

So that each component has the same voltage.

Both lamps have the full battery voltage across them.


The battery current is divided between the two lamps.

Most circuits contain a mixture of series and


parallel connections

The terms series circuit and parallel circuit are


sometimes used, but only the simplest of
circuits are entirely one type or the other. It is
better to refer to specific components and say
they are connected in series or connected in
parallel.

For example: the circuit on the right shows a


Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
resistor and LED connected in series (on the right) and two lamps
connected in parallel (in the centre). The switch is connected in series with
the two lamps.

Lamps in Series

If several lamps are connected in series


they will all be switched on and off together
by a switch connected anywhere in the
circuit. The supply voltage is divided
equally between the lamps (assuming they
are all identical). If one lamp blows all the
lamps will go out because the circuit is broken.

Christmas tree Lights


The lamps on a Christmas tree are connected in series.

Normally you would expect all the lamps to go out if one blew, but Christmas
tree lamps are special! They are designed to short circuit (conduct like a wire
link) when they blow, so the circuit is not broken and the other lamps remain
lit, making it easier to locate the faulty lamp. Sets also include one 'fuse' lamp
which blows normally.

If there are 20 lamps and the mains electricity voltage is 240V, each lamp must
be suitable for a 12V supply because the 240V is divided equally between the
20 lamps: 240V ÷ 20 = 12V.

WARNING! The Christmas tree lamps may seem safe because they use only
12V but they are connected to the mains supply which can be lethal. Always
unplug from the mains before changing lamps. The voltage across the holder of
a missing lamp is the full 240V of the mains supply! (Yes, it really is!)

Lamps in Parallel

If several lamps are connected in parallel each one


has the full supply voltage across it. The lamps may
be switched on and off independently by connecting a
switch in series with each lamp as shown in the
circuit diagram. This arrangement is used to control
the lamps in buildings.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
This type of circuit is often called a parallel circuit but you can see that it is not
really so simple - the switches are in series with the lamps, and it is these
switch and lamp pairs that are connected in parallel.

Switches in Series

If several on-off switches are


connected in series they must all be
closed (on) to complete the circuit.

The diagram shows a simple circuit


with two switches connected in series
to control a lamp.

Switch S1 AND Switch S2 must be closed to light the lamp.

Switches in Parallel

If several on-off switches are


connected in parallel only one need to
be closed (on) to complete the circuit.

The diagram shows a simple circuit


with two switches connected in
parallel to control a lamp.

Switch S1 OR Switch S2 (or both of them) must be closed to light the lamp.

Characteristics of Series Circuit

Resistance

Resistance is the property of a component which restricts the flow of electric


current. Energy is used up as the voltage across the component drives the
current through it and this energy appears as heat in the component.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Resistance is measured in ohms; the symbol for ohm is an omega .
1 is quite small for electronics so resistances are often given in k and M .
1 k = 1000 1 M = 1,000,000 .

Resistors used in electronics can have resistances as low as 0.1 or as high as


10 M .

Resistors connected in Series

When resistors are connected in series their combined


resistance is equal to the individual resistances added
together. For example if resistors R1 and R2 are connected in
series their combined resistance, R, is given by:

Combined resistance in series: R = R1 + R2

This can be extended for more resistors:


R = R1 + R2 + R3 + R4 +...

Note that the combined resistance in series will always be greater than any
of the individual resistances.

Voltage and Current for components in Series

Voltages add up for components connected in series. The


voltage is dropping or distributed to each load.
Currents are the same through all components
connected in series.

In this circuit the 4V across the resistor and the 2V


across the LED add up to the battery voltage:
2V + 4V = 6V.

The current through all parts (battery, resistor and LED) is 20mA.

Combined Voltage drop in series: V = V1 + V2


This can be extended for more resistors: V = V1 + V2 + V3 + V4 +...
The Current are constant in series: I = I1 = I2 = I3 = I4 =...

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Characteristics of Parallel Circuit

Resistors connected in Parallel


When resistors are connected in parallel their
combined resistance is less than any of the
individual resistances. There is a special equation for
the combined resistance of two resistors R1 and R2:
Combined resistance of R1 × R2
two resistors in parallel: R = R1 + R2

For more than two resistors connected in parallel a


more difficult equation must be used. This adds up
the reciprocal ("one over") of each resistance to give the reciprocal of the
combined resistance, R:

1 1 1 1
= + + + ...
R R1 R2 R3

The simpler equation for two resistors in parallel is much easier to use!

Note that the combined resistance in parallel will always be less than any of
the individual resistances.

Voltage and Current for components in Parallel

Voltages are the same across all components


connected in parallel.
Currents add up for components connected in parallel.
The current is dropping or distributed to each load.

In this circuit the battery, resistor and lamp all have 6V


across them.

The 30mA current through the resistor and the 60mA current through the
lamp add up to the 90mA current through the battery.

Combined Current drop in series: I = I1 + I2


This can be extended for more resistors: I = I1 + I2 + I3 + I4 +...
The Voltage is constant in parallel: V = V1 = V2 = V3 = V4 =...
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Self-Check #1.3-1E

LO3. IDENTIFY ELECTRONIC SYMBOLS AND INTERPRET SCHEMATIC


DIAGRAMS AND PARTS LIST

Multiple Choices: Choose the correct letters that best describe the statement.
Write your answers in capital letter on your answer sheet.

1. This are stating the relationship of voltage, current and resistance in


circuit:
A. Voltage Law
B. Current Law
C. Resistance Law
D. Ohms Law

2. The rate of using energy or supplying energy.


A. Voltage
B. Current
C. Resistance
D. Power

3. Ohms Law states that the current is directly proportional to the


___________ and inversely proportional to the resistance.
A. Voltage
B. Current
C. Resistance
D. Power

4. In getting the unknown value of the resistance is:


A. Voltage multiplied by Current
B. Voltage divide by Current
C. Current divide by Voltage
D. Voltage multiplied by Power

5. In getting the unknown value of Power is:


A. Voltage divide by Current
B. Voltage multiplied by Current
C. Voltage multiplied by Resistance
D. Voltage divide by Resistance
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
ANSWER KEY #1.3-1E
Self-Check of #1.3-1E

LO3. IDENTIFY ELECTRONIC SYMBOLS AND INTERPRET SCHEMATIC


DIAGRAMS AND PARTS LIST

1. D
2. D
3. A
4. B
5. B

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
TASK SHEET 1.3-1E

Title: Series Parallel Connection

Performance Objective: The trainee must be able to interpret the series


parallel connection and apply the operation in
computing the unknown value in the circuit through
Ohms Law.

Supplies/Materials : Paper and Ball pen

Equipment : Calculator

Steps/Procedure:

1. Analyze carefully the following giving circuit and compute the unknown
value.

2. Apply the operation of Ohms Law to the problem.

3. Five resistors connect in series, compute the following?


R1 = 10Ω IT = 0.2A
R1 R2 R2 = 5Ω
RT R3 R3 = 15Ω
R4 = 25Ω
R5 = 20Ω
R5 R4
Compute:
RT =? V1 =? V5 =? I1 =? I5 =?
VT =? V2 =? I2 =?
V3 =? I3 =?
V4 =? I4 =?

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
4. Five resistors connect in parallel, compute the following?

RT R1 R2 R3 R4 R5

R1 = 10Ω R4 = 25Ω VT = 6V
R2 = 5Ω R5 = 20Ω
R3 = 15Ω
Compute:
RT =? V1 =? V5 =? I1 =? I5 =?
IT =? V2 =? I2 =?
V3 =? I3 =?
V4 =? I4 =?

5. Eight resistor connected in Combination of Series Parallel, compute the


following?

R3 R7
RT R1 R2 R4 R6 R8
R5

VT = 12V R1 = 10Ω R6 = 10Ω


R2 = 5Ω R7 = 5Ω
R3 = 15Ω R8 = 15Ω
R4 = 25Ω
R5 = 20Ω

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Compute:
RT =? V1 =? V5 =? I1 =? I5 =?
IT =? V2 =? V6 =? I2 =? I6 =?
V3 =? V7 =? I3 =? I7 =?
V4 =? V8 =? I4 =? I8 =?

Assessment Method:

Demonstration, Evaluate Using Performance criteria checklist

Performance Criteria Checklist


Task Sheet #1.3-1E

CRITERIA YES NO
Did I...
1. Explain the difference between Series and parallel?
2. Compute the unknown value of the in the circuit?
3. Safety precautions and procedures observed?

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Information Sheet # 1.3-1F

LO3. IDENTIFY ELECTRONIC SYMBOLS AND INTERPRET SCHEMATIC


DIAGRAMS AND PARTS LIST

Learning Objectives: In an electronics shop scenario, the trainees will be


able to explain the function of a resistor in a circuit and to identify the value
of a resistor according to color codes with-in 25 minutes.

Resistors
Color Code | Tolerance | Real Values (E6 & E12 series) | Power Rating

Example: Circuit symbol:

Function
Resistors restrict the flow of electric current, for example a resistor is placed in
series with a light-emitting diode (LED) to limit the current passing through the
LED.

Connecting and soldering


Resistors may be connected either way round. They are not damaged by heat
when soldering.
The Resistor
Color Code
Color Number
Resistor values - the resistor color code
Black 0
Resistance is measured in ohms; the symbol for ohm is an
omega . Brown 1
1 is quite small so resistor values are often given in k and Red 2
M .
Orange 3
1 k = 1000 1 M = 1000000 .
Yellow 4
Resistor values are normally shown using colored bands. Green 5
Each color represents a number as shown in the table.
Blue 6
Most resistors have 4 bands: Violet 7

The first band gives the first digit. Grey 8


The second band gives the second digit. White 9
The third band indicates the number of zeros.
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
The fourth band is used to shows the tolerance (precision) of the resistor,
this may be ignored for almost all circuits but further details are given
below.

Nominal Value = 1st digit 2nd digit x Multiplier

This resistor has red (2), violet (7), yellow (4 zeros) and gold bands.
So its nominal value is 270000Ω = 270 kΩ .
On circuit diagrams the Ω is usually omitted and the value is written 270K.

Small value resistors (less than 10 ohm)


The standard color code cannot show values of less than 10 . To show these
small values two special colors are used for the third band: gold which means
× 0.1 and silver which means × 0.01. The first and second bands represent the
digits as normal.

For example:
red, violet, gold bands represent 27 × 0.1 = 2.7
green, blue, silver bands represent 56 × 0.01 = 0.56

Tolerance of resistors (fourth band of color code)


The tolerance of a resistor is shown by the fourth band of the color code.
Tolerance is the precision of the resistor and it is given as a percentage. For
example a 390 resistor with a tolerance of ±10% will have a value within 10%
of 390 , between 390 - 39 = 351 and 390 + 39 = 429 (39 is 10% of 390).

A special color code is used for the fourth band tolerance:


silver ±10%, gold ±5%, red ±2%, brown ±1%.
If no fourth band is shown the tolerance is ±20%.
Tolerance may be ignored for almost all circuits because precise resistor values
are rarely required.
Nominal Value = 1st digit 2nd digit x Multiplier

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
To compute the tolerance of the resistor:

Example:red, violet, gold, gold bands represent 27 × 0.1 = 2.7 ± 5%


Tolerance = Nominal Value x % Tolerance
Tolerance = 2.7Ω x 0.05% = 0.135Ω
Value 100
Minimum = Nominal Value – Tolerance Value
Tolerance

Minimum Tolerance = 2.7Ω - 0.135Ω = 2.565Ω


Maximum = Nominal Value + Tolerance Value
Tolerance

Maximum Tolerance = 2.7Ω + 0.135Ω = 2.835Ω

COMMON FAULT OF THE RESISTOR


This will be finding out when you compare the nominal value to the
measured value.
This will be used for resistor checking, if it’s GOOD or OPEN or CHANGE
VALUE.
To check if the resistor is good condition using multi-meter (Tester); the
measured value must be with-in the computed minimum and maximum
tolerance of the nominal value.
To check the resistor if there is a fault like open resistor; the pointer of
the multi-meter no longer move or deflect. If the fault is change value; the
measured value is less than to the computed minimum tolerance and more
than to the computed maximum tolerance of the nominal value.

Resistor shorthand
Resistor values are often written on circuit diagrams using a code system
which avoids using a decimal point because it is easy to miss the small dot.
Instead the letters R, K and M are used in place of the decimal point. To read
the code: replace the letter with a decimal point, then multiply the value by
1000 if the letter was K, or 1000000 if the letter was M. The letter R means
multiply by 1.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
For example:

560R means 560


2K7 means 2.7 k = 2700
39K means 39 k
1M0 means 1.0 M = 1000 k

Real resistor values (the E6 and E12 series)


You may have noticed that resistors are not available with every possible
value, for example 22k and 47k are readily available, but 25k and 50k
are not!
Why is this? Imagine that you decided to make resistors every 10 giving
10, 20, 30, 40, 50 and so on. That seems fine, but what happens when you
reach 1000? It would be pointless to make 1000, 1010, 1020, 1030 and so on
because for these values 10 is a very small difference, too small to be
noticeable in most circuits. In fact it would be difficult to make resistors
sufficiently accurate.

To produce a sensible range of resistor values you need to increase the size of
the 'step' as the value increases. The standard resistor values are based on this
idea and they form a series which follows the same pattern for every multiple of
ten.
The E6 series (6 values for each multiple of ten, for resistors with 20%
tolerance)
10, 15, 22, 33, 47, 68, ... then it continues 100, 150, 220, 330, 470, 680,
1000 etc.
Notice how the step size increases as the value increases. For this series the
step (to the next value) is roughly half the value.

The E12 series (12 values for each multiple of ten, for resistors with 10%
tolerance)
10, 12, 15, 18, 22, 27, 33, 39, 47, 56, 68, 82, ... then it continues 100, 120,
150 etc. Notice how this is the E6 series with an extra value in the gaps.
The E12 series is the one most frequently used for resistors. It allows you to
choose a value within 10% of the precise value you need. This is sufficiently
accurate for almost all projects and it is sensible because most resistors are
only accurate to ±10% (called their 'tolerance'). For example a resistor marked
390 could vary by ±10% × 390 = ±39 , so it could be any value between
351 and 429 .

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Power Ratings of Resistors
Electrical energy is converted to heat when current
flows through a resistor. Usually the effect is
negligible, but if the resistance is low (or the voltage
across the resistor high) a large current may pass
making the resistor become noticeably warm. The
resistor must be able to withstand the heating effect
and resistors have power ratings to show this.

Power ratings of resistors are rarely quoted in parts


lists because for most circuits the standard power
ratings of 0.25W or 0.5W are suitable. For the rare
cases where a higher power is required it should be
High power resistors
clearly specified in the parts list, these will be
(5W top, 25W bottom)
circuits using low value resistors (less than about
300 ) or high voltages (more than 15V).
The power, P, developed in a resistor is given by:

P = I² × where: P = power developed in the resistor in watts


R (W)
or I = current through the resistor in amps
P = V² / (A)
R R = resistance of the resistor in ohms ( )
V = voltage across the resistor in volts (V)

Examples:

A 470 resistor with 10V across it, needs a power rating P = V²/R =
10²/470 = 0.21W.
In this case a standard 0.25W resistor would be suitable.
A 27 resistor with 10V across it, needs a power rating P = V²/R =
10²/27 = 3.7W.
A high power resistor with a rating of 5W would be suitable.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Self-Check #1.3-1F

LO3. IDENTIFY ELECTRONIC SYMBOLS AND INTERPRET SCHEMATIC


DIAGRAMS AND PARTS LIST

Multiple Choices: Choose the correct letters that best describe the statement.
Write your answers in capital letter on your answer sheet.

1. The Power Rating of a Resistor is according to:


A. Color
B. Material used
C. Size
D. Terminal

2. In a four color band resistor; the first band.


A. Second Digit
B. Multiplier
C. Tolerance
D. First Digit

3. In a four color band resistor, in what band represent the tolerance of


a resistor.
A. First band
B. Second band
C. Third band
D. Fourth band

4. The nominal value of a color code Green, Violet, Brown and Gold.
A. 5.7 ± 5%
B. 570 ± 5%
C. 57 ± 5%
D. 5.7k ± 5%

5. The nominal value of a color code Orange, White, Gold and Silver.
A. 3.9 ± 10%
B. 39 ± 10%
C. 3.9 ± 5%
D. 39 ± 5%

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
ANSWER KEY #1.3-1F
Self-Check of #1.3-1F

LO3. IDENTIFY ELECTRONIC SYMBOLS AND INTERPRET SCHEMATIC


DIAGRAMS AND PARTS LIST

1. C
2. D
3. D
4. B
5. A

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
TASK SHEET 1.3-1F

Title: Resistors Color Coding.

Performance Objective: The trainee must be able to identify the type of a


resistor and read the value of the resistor according
to their color coding.

Supplies/Materials : Paper and Ball pen

Equipment : Assorted carbon types resistor

Steps/Procedure:

1. Prepared the supplies and material.


2. Arrange the resistor by numbering from 1 to 10.
3. Read the nominal value of the resistor in color coding and record to
table A.
4. Measured the resistance of each resistor and record to table A.
5. Compute the tolerance, minimum and maximum tolerance of the
resistor.
6. Table A. Fill-up this table according to the requirements.
Res Minimu Maxim Conditio
Nomin Measur
isto Toler m um n
Color Code al ed
r ance Toleran Toleran (Good/Fa
Value Value
No. ce ce ult)
R1

R2

R3

R4

R5

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
R6

R7

R8

R9

R10

7. Color Coding: Identify the nominal value of the resistor and compute
the tolerance of each.
Resis
Nominal Minimum Maximum
tor Color Code Tolerance
Value Tolerance Tolerance
No.
Green, Red,
R1
Brown, Gold
Yellow, Blue,
R2
Orange, Silver
Brown, Black,
R3
Green, Gold
Red, Red, Gold,
R4
Silver
Brown, Grey,
R5
Black
Blue, Violet,
R6
Silver, Gold
Orange, Orange,
R7
Orange
Blue, Red, Red,
R8
Gold, Silver
Brown, Black,
R9 Yellow, Orange,
Silver
Red, Red, Red,
R10
Silver, Gold
8. Identify the color code of a given nominal value and compute the
tolerance
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Resis
Nominal Minimum Maximum
tor Color Code Tolerance
Value Tolerance Tolerance
No.
1.2Ω ±
R1
5%
12.5Ω
R2
±10%
152Ω
R3
±20%
56kΩ
R4
±5%
128.7Ω
R5
±2%
100Ω
R6
±0.25%
2.4MΩ
R7
±0.5%
1.8kΩ
R8
±0.1%
1.8kΩ
R9
±5%
100Ω
R10
±20%

Assessment Method:

Demonstration, Evaluate Using Performance criteria checklist

Performance Criteria Checklist


Task Sheet #1.3-1F

CRITERIA YES NO
Did I..
1. Interpret the function of the resistor?
2. Read the value of the resistor by means of color coding?
3. Safety precautions and procedures observed?

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Information Sheet # 1.3-1G

LO3. IDENTIFY ELECTRONIC SYMBOLS AND INTERPRET SCHEMATIC


DIAGRAMS AND PARTS LIST

Learning Objectives: In an electronics shop scenario, the trainees will be


able to explain and identify the different types of a resistor with-in 25
minutes.

Type of a Resistor

The type of materials use in making the resistor or the structure of the
device packaging all strongly affect the characteristics of the resistors, and its
applications.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Potentiometer is design for the variation or controlling the voltage like in
volume control, tone control, bass and treble, while in rheostat design to
varying or controlling the current in the circuit like in flat iron, oven toaster,
sealer and other appliance controlling the temperature.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Self-Check #1.3-1G

LO3. IDENTIFY ELECTRONIC SYMBOLS AND INTERPRET SCHEMATIC


DIAGRAMS AND PARTS LIST

Multiple Choices: Choose the correct letters that best describe the statement.
Write your answers in capital letter on your answer sheet.

1. This type of resistor compose of carbon:


A. Wire wound
B. Foil
C. Filament
D. Carbon Composition

2. This type is very accurate and ultra low noise of resistor.


A. Precision Wire Wound
B. Metal Oxide Film
C. Precision Metal Film
D. Variable Resistor

3. This type is highly accurate with a very low TCR.


A. Precision Wire Wound
B. Metal Oxide Film
C. Precision Metal Film
D. Variable Resistor

4. This type of resistor is better stability and lower temperature


coefficient of resistance (TCR).
A. Wire wound
B. Foil
C. Filament
D. Carbon Composition

5. In variable types of resistor how many terminal are there?


A. Three
B. Two
C. Four
D. Five

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
ANSWER KEY # 1.3-1G
Self-Check of #1.3-1G

LO3. IDENTIFY ELECTRONIC SYMBOLS AND INTERPRET SCHEMATIC


DIAGRAMS AND PARTS LIST

1. D
2. C
3. A
4. B
5. A

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
TASK SHEET 1

Title: Different types of a Resistors

Performance Objective: The trainee must be able to identify the type of a


resistor.

Supplies/Materials : Paper and Ball pen

Equipment : Different types of resistor

Steps/Procedure:

A. Prepared the supplies and material.


B. With the given types of resistor arrange according to their type.
C. Read the value of the resistor and record to table A.
D. Measured the resistance of each resistor and record to table A.
E. Compare the nominal value to the measured value and identify the
condition of each.
Table A. Fill-up this table according to the requirements.
Condition
Resistor Types of Resistance Good or
Nominal Value
No. Resistor Reading Bad

R1

R2

R3

R4

R5

R6

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
R7

R8

R9

R10

Assessment Method:

Demonstration, Evaluate Using Performance criteria checklist

Performance Criteria Checklist


Task Sheet #1.3-1G

CRITERIA YES NO
Did I..
1. Identify the types of a resistor?
a. Carbon Composition.
b. Carbon Film.
c. Metal Oxide Film.
d. Precision Metal Film.
e. Foil.
f. Filament.
g. Wire wound.
h. Photoresistor and Thermistor.
i. Variable Potentiometer & Rheostat.
2. Safety precautions and procedures observed?

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Information Sheet # 1.3-1H

LO3. IDENTIFY ELECTRONIC SYMBOLS AND INTERPRET SCHEMATIC


DIAGRAMS AND PARTS LIST

Learning Objectives: In an electronics shop scenario, the trainees will be


able to explain the function of a capacitor in a circuit and to identify
different types and value of a capacitor according to color and number codes
with-in 25 minutes.

Capacitor

Function
Capacitors store electric charge. They are used with resistors in timing circuits
because it takes time for a capacitor to fill with charge. They are used to
smooth varying DC supplies by acting as a reservoir of charge. They are also
used in filter circuits because capacitors easily pass AC (changing) signals but
they block DC (constant) signals.

Capacitance
This is a measure of a capacitor's ability to store charge. A large capacitance
means that more charge can be stored. Capacitance is measured in farads,
symbol F. However 1F is very large, so prefixes are used to show the smaller
values.

Three prefixes (multipliers) are used, µ (micro), n (nano) and p (pico):

µ means 10-6 (millionth), so 1000000µF = 1F


n means 10-9 (thousand-millionth), so 1000nF = 1µF
p means 10-12 (million-millionth), so 1000pF = 1nF

Capacitor values can be very difficult to find because there are many types of
capacitor with different labeling systems!

There are many types of capacitor but they can be split into two groups,
polarized and Non-polarized. Each group has its own circuit symbol.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Types of Capacitor

Practical capacitors are available commercially in many different forms.


The type of internal dielectric, the structure of the plates and the device
packaging all strongly affect the characteristics of the capacitor, and its
applications.

Dielectric Materials
 Paper
 Plastic
 Glass
 Mica
 Ceramics
 Air
Paper Type (Electrolytic)

Plastic Types (Mylar)

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Glass Type

Mica Types

Ceramic Types

Air Type (Radio & TV Tuner purposes)

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Polarized capacitors (large values, 1µF +)

Examples:

+
Circuit symbol:

Electrolytic Capacitors
Electrolytic capacitors are polarized and they must be connected the correct
way round, at least one of their leads will be marked + or -. They are not
damaged by heat when soldering.

There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors; axial where the leads are
attached to each end (220µF in picture) and radial where both leads are at the
same end (10µF in picture). Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and
they stand upright on the circuit board.

It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors because they are clearly
printed with their capacitance and voltage rating. The voltage rating can be
quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when selecting an
electrolytic capacitor. If the project parts list does not specify a voltage, choose
a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the project's power supply
voltage. 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits.

Tantalum Bead Capacitors


Tantalum bead capacitors are polarized and have low voltage
ratings like electrolytic capacitors. They are expensive but very
small, so they are used where a large capacitance is needed in
a small size.

Modern tantalum bead capacitors are printed with their


capacitance, voltage and polarity in full. However older ones use a color-code
system which has two stripes (for the two digits) and a spot of color for the
number of zeros to give the value in µF. The standard color code is used, but
for the spot, grey is used to mean × 0.01 and white means × 0.1 so that values
of less than 10µF can be shown. A third color stripe near the leads shows the
voltage (yellow 6.3V, black 10V, green 16V, blue 20V, grey 25V, white 30V,
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
pink 35V). The positive (+) lead is to the right when the spot is facing you:
'when the spot is in sight, the positive is to the right'.

For example: blue, grey, black spot means 68µF


For example: blue, grey, white spot means 6.8µF
For example: blue, grey, grey spot means 0.68µF

Non-polarized capacitors (small values, up to 1µF)

Examples:

Circuit symbol:

Small value capacitors are un-polarized and may be connected either way
round. They are not damaged by heat when soldering, except for one unusual
type (polystyrene). They have high voltage ratings of at least 50V, usually 250V
or so. It can be difficult to find the values of these small capacitors because
there are many types of them and several different labeling
systems!

Many small value capacitors have their value printed but


without a multiplier, so you need to use experience to work out
what the multiplier should be!

For example 0.1 means 0.1µF = 100nF.

Sometimes the multiplier is used in place of the decimal point:


For example: 4n7 means 4.7nF.

Capacitor Number Code


A number code is often used on small capacitors where printing is
difficult:

the 1st number is the 1st digit,


the 2nd number is the 2nd digit,
the 3rd number is the number of zeros to give the capacitance in pF.
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Ignore any letters - they just indicate tolerance and voltage rating.

For example: 102 means 1000pF = 1nF (not 102pF!)

For example: 472J means 4700pF = 4.7nF (J means 5% tolerance).

Colour Code
Capacitor Color Code
A color code was used on polyester capacitors for many years. Colour Number
It is now obsolete, but of course there are many still around. Black 0
The colors should be read like the resistor code, the top three
Brown 1
color bands giving the value in pF. Ignore the 4th band
(tolerance) and 5th band (voltage rating). Red 2
Orange 3
For example:
Yellow 4
Brown, black, orange means 10000pF = Green 5
10nF = 0.01µF.
Blue 6
Note that there are no gaps between the colors Violet 7
bands, so 2 identical bands actually appear as a
Grey 8
wide band.
White 9
For example:

Wide red, yellow means 220nF = 0.22µF.

Other types of capacitor with a color coded value is look like a resistor you
may distinguish by means of the physical color, they are color yellow green or
light green.

Polystyrene Capacitors
This type is rarely used now. Their value (in pF) is normally printed without
units. Polystyrene capacitors can be damaged by heat
when soldering (it melts the polystyrene!) so you
should use a heat sink (such as a crocodile clip). Clip
the heat sink to the lead between the capacitor and the joint.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Real capacitor values (the E3 and E6 series)
You may have noticed that capacitors are not available with every possible
value, for example 22µF and 47µF are readily available, but 25µF and 50µF are
not!

Why is this? Imagine that you decided to make capacitors every 10µF giving 10,
20, 30, 40, 50 and so on. That seems fine, but what happens when you reach
1000? It would be pointless to make 1000, 1010, 1020, 1030 and so on
because for these values 10 is a very small difference, too small to be
noticeable in most circuits and capacitors cannot be made with that accuracy.

To produce a sensible range of capacitor values you need to increase the size of
the 'step' as the value increases. The standard capacitor values are based on
this idea and they form a series which follows the same pattern for every
multiple of ten.

The E3 series (3 values for each multiple of ten)


10, 22, 47, ... then it continues 100, 220, 470, 1000, 2200, 4700, 10000 etc.
Notice how the step size increases as the value increases (values roughly
double each time).

The E6 series (6 values for each multiple of ten)


10, 15, 22, 33, 47, 68, ... then it continues 100, 150, 220, 330, 470, 680,
1000 etc.
Notice how this is the E3 series with an extra value in the gaps.

The E3 series is the one most frequently used for capacitors because many
types cannot be made with very accurate values.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Variable capacitors
Variable capacitors are mostly used in radio tuning
circuits and they are sometimes called 'tuning
capacitors'. They have very small capacitance
values, typically between 100pF and 500pF Variable Capacitor Symbol
(100pF = 0.0001µF). The type illustrated usually
has trimmers built in (for making small
adjustments - see below) as well as the main
variable capacitor.

Many variable capacitors have very short spindles Variable Capacitor


which are not suitable for the standard knobs used
for variable resistors and rotary switches. It would be wise to check that a
suitable knob is available before ordering a variable capacitor.

Variable capacitors are not normally used in timing circuits because their
capacitance is too small to be practical and the range of values available is very
limited. Instead timing circuits use a fixed capacitor and a variable resistor if it
is necessary to vary the time period.

Trimmer capacitors
Trimmer capacitors (trimmers) are miniature
variable capacitors. They are designed to be
mounted directly onto the circuit board and
adjusted only when the circuit is built. Trimmer Capacitor Symbol
A small screwdriver or similar tool is required to
adjust trimmers. The process of adjusting them
requires patience because the presence of your
hand and the tool will slightly change the
capacitance of the circuit in the region of the
trimmer!
Trimmer Capacitor
Trimmer capacitors are only available with very
small capacitances, normally less than 100pF. It is impossible to reduce their
capacitance to zero, so they are usually specified by their minimum and
maximum values, for example 2-10pF.

Trimmers are the capacitor equivalent of presets which are miniature variable
resistors.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Checking of Capacitor

 Good Condition Capacitor


 Procedure
1. Discharges the capacitor by shorting the two terminals.
2. Set the VOM to the resistance range ( x1, x10 for high value and x100K
for small value)
3. Identify the polarity (if
polarized).
4. Connect the two test probe to
the terminal lead of the
capacitor.
5. Observe the pointer of the meter
if quickly deflect to the right
then slowly go back to the
original position.
6. Then disconnect the test prod to
the terminal lead of the capacitor.
7. And then connect it again, the pointer of the meter will not move.

Common Fault of Capacitor


 Shorted
 Open
 Leaky

 Shorted
• The two metallic plates are totally
connected to each other.
• The pointer is deflecting to the right;
and not goes back to the original
position.

 Open
• One of the terminal lead are not
connected to the metal plate.
• The pointer will not move to their
position.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
 Leaky
• The dielectric materials are partial
damage.
• The pointer is quickly deflected to the
right then slowly goes back to the left
but stay to the middle or the pointer is
moving to the left and right.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Self-Check #1.3-1H

LO3. IDENTIFY ELECTRONIC SYMBOLS AND INTERPRET SCHEMATIC


DIAGRAMS AND PARTS LIST

Multiple Choices: Choose the correct letters that best describe the statement.
Write your answers in capital letter on your answer sheet.

1. This component capable to hold or store electric charge:


E. Capacitor
F. Resistor
G. Transistor
H. Thermistor

2. In capacitor colors coding the value of brown, red, black spot are.
A. 1.2µF
B. 12µF
C. 120µF
D. 0.12µF

3. In capacitor numbers coding the value of 103 are.


A. 100pF
B. 1000pF
C. 10000pF
D. 10pF

4. The condition of a capacitor that the pointer will not move to their
position is.
A. Good
B. Leaky
C. Shorted
D. Open

5. The condition of a capacitor that the pointer deflects to the right and stay
to zero is.
A. Good
B. Leaky
C. Shorted
D. Open

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
ANSWER KEY #1.3-1H
Self-Check of #1.3-1H

LO3. IDENTIFY ELECTRONIC SYMBOLS AND INTERPRET SCHEMATIC


DIAGRAMS AND PARTS LIST

1. A
2. B
3. C
4. D
5. C

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
TASK SHEET 1.3-1H

Title: Capacitor Checking

Performance Objective: The trainee must be able to read the value of the
capacitor in color and number coding and to the
condition of the capacitor and their conversion.

Supplies/Materials : Paper, Ball pen

Equipment : 10 pcs. Assorted capacitor, Tester V.O.M

Steps/Procedure:

a. Prepare the following Materials


b. Arrange the capacitor by numbering 1 to 10.
c. Read the capacitance and working voltage of the capacitor and
write it on the table A.
d. Measured the resistance of each capacitor.
e. Based on the checking write down the condition of the
capacitor.

Capacitor Capacitance/Working
Types Resistance Condition
No. Voltages

C1

C2

C3

C4

C5

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
C6

C7

C8

C9

C10

f. Convert the following in this table.


Nominal Number Nano Pico
Color Code Micro Farad
Value Code Farad Farad
222

103

50 nf
Yellow, Violet,
Brown
56
Orange, Orange,
Orange
10 pf

100
Green, Blue,
Yellow
47 0.000047 uf
Assessment Method:

Demonstration, Evaluate Using Performance criteria checklist

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Performance Criteria Checklist
Task Sheet #1

CRITERIA YES NO
Did I..
1. Explain the function of the capacitor in circuit?
2. Identify the different type of capacitor?
3. Read the value of the capacitor according to color and
number coding?
4. Safety precautions and procedures observed?

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Information Sheet # 1.3-1I

LO3. IDENTIFY ELECTRONIC SYMBOLS AND INTERPRET SCHEMATIC


DIAGRAMS AND PARTS LIST

Learning Objectives: In an electronics shop scenario, the trainees will be able to


explain the function of ainductor in a circuit and to identify different types and
application, with-in 25 minutes.

Inductor

An inductor or a reactor is a passive electrical component that can store


energy in a magnetic field created by the electric current passing through it. An
inductor's ability to store magnetic energy is measured by its inductance, in units
of henries.
Typically an inductor is a conducting wire shaped as a coil, the loops helping
to create a strong magnetic field inside the coil due to Faraday's law of induction.
Inductors are one of the basic electronic components used in electronics where
current and voltage change with time, due to the ability of inductors to delay and
reshape alternating currents.

Symbols

Inductance (L) (measured in henries) is an effect resulting from the magnetic


field that forms around a current-carrying conductor that tends to resist changes
in the current. Electric current through the conductor creates a magnetic flux
proportional to the current. A change in this current creates a change in magnetic
flux that, in turn, by Faraday's law generates an electromotive force (EMF) that
acts to oppose this change in current. Inductance is a measure of the amount of
EMF generated for a unit change in current.
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
For example, an inductor with an inductance of 1 Henry produces an EMF of
1 volt when the current through the inductor changes at the rate of 1 ampere per
second. The number of loops, the size of each loop, and the material it is wrapped
around all affect the inductance. For example, the magnetic flux linking these
turns can be increased by coiling the conductor around a material with a high
permeability such as iron. This can increase the inductance by 2000 times,
although less so at high frequencies.

Pictorial (Inductor or Coil)

Kinds of Inductor or Coil


 Air coil
The Air coil is use for signal reception specially in tuning purposes.

 Ferrite honeycomb coil


The honeycomb coil is wound in a crisscross manner to reduce distributed
capacitance. It is used in the tuning circuits of radios in the ranges of medium and
long waves, thanks to the shape of the winding achieving inductively high values in
low volume.

 Toroidal core coil


A simple coil wound on a cylindrical form creates an external magnetic field
with a north and South Pole. A toroidal coil can be created from a cylindrical coil
by bending it into a doughnut shape thereby merging the north and south poles. In
a toroidal coil, the magnetic flux is largely kept internal to the coil. This results in
less magnetic radiation from coil and less sensitivity to external fields.

Checking of Inductor or Coil


In checking the coil just only checks the continuity of the two terminals of
the coil.
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Transformer
A transformer is a device that transfers electrical energy from one circuit to
another through inductively coupled conductors — the transformer's coils. Except
for air-core transformers, the conductors are commonly wound around a single
iron-rich core, or around separate but magnetically-coupled cores. A varying
current in the first or "primary" winding creates a varying magnetic field in the core
(or cores) of the transformer. This varying magnetic field induces a varying
electromotive force (EMF) or "voltage" in the "secondary" winding. This effect is
called mutual induction.
The two types of transformer are step up transformer and step down
transformer. Step up transformer is the supply voltage is low and the output
voltage is high and Step down transformer is the supply voltage is high and the
output voltage is low.

Symbol

Development

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Pictorial (Industrial Transformer)

Pictorial (Electronics Transformer)


Laminated Steel Core Toroidal Core

Transformer Checking
1. By checking the transformer we are checking the continuity of the coil.
2. First check the primary winding. (with resistance reading)
3. Second check the secondary winding. (with resistance reading)
4. Third check the primary to metal core and secondary to metal core. (no
connection)
5. Fourth the primary and the secondary winding. (no connection)

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Self-Check #1.3-1I

LO3. IDENTIFY ELECTRONIC SYMBOLS AND INTERPRET SCHEMATIC


DIAGRAMS AND PARTS LIST

Multiple Choices: Choose the correct letters that best describe the statement.
Write your answers in capital letter on your answer sheet.

1. A passive electrical component that can store energy in a magnetic field


created by the electric current passing through it.
A. Toroidal Core
B. Steel Core
C. Transformer
D. Inductor

2. This type of transformer that the output voltage is low while input voltage is
high.
A. Step up transformer
B. Step down transformer
C. Transformer
D. Coil

3. This type of transformer that the input voltage is low while output voltage is
high.
A. Step up transformer
B. Step down transformer
C. Transformer
D. Coil

4. The other term for inductor.


A. Step down transformer
B. Transformer
C. Coil
D. Step up transformer

5. The effect of varying magnetic field induces a varying voltage in the


secondary winding is called.
A. Magnetic Flux
B. Induction
C. Mutual Induction
D. Magnetism
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
ANSWER KEY #1.3-1I
Self-Check of #1.3-1I

LO1. ANALYZE AND INTERPRET ELECTRONICS COMPONENT

1. D
2. B
3. A
4. C
5. C

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
TASK SHEET 1.3-1I

Title: Coil and Transformer Checking

Performance Objective: The trainee must be able to check the


component and identify the condition of it.

Supplies/Materials : Paper, Ball pen

Equipment : Transformer, Tester V.O.M

Steps/Procedure:

A. Prepare the following Materials


B. Measured the resistance of each terminal.
C. Read the measured resistance and write it on the table A.
D. Table A: Fill-up the required information at the bland.

Transformer
Description Types
No.

T1

Primary
Resistance
Terminal (Measured Condition
Value)
0 - 110

0 - 220

110 - 220
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Secondary
Resistance
Terminal (Measured Condition
Value)
0-3

0 - 4.5

0-6

0-9

0 - 12

Assessment Method:

Demonstration, Evaluate Using Performance criteria checklist

Performance Criteria Checklist


Task Sheet #1

CRITERIA YES NO
Did I..
1. Explain the function of the coil and transformer in circuit?
2. Differentiate the different between coil and transformer?
3. Check the electronics component?
4. Safety precautions and procedures observed?

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Information Sheet # 1.3-1J

LO3. IDENTIFY ELECTRONIC SYMBOLS AND INTERPRET SCHEMATIC


DIAGRAMS AND PARTS LIST

Learning Objectives: In an electronics shop scenario, the trainees will be able to


explain the function of a diode in a circuit and to identify the different types and
application, with-in 25 minutes.

SEMICONDUCTOR
A semiconductor is a material that has a resistivity value between that of a
conductor and an insulator. The conductivity of a semiconductor material can be
varied under an external electrical field. Devices made from semiconductor
materials are the foundation of modern electronics, including radio, computers,
telephones, and many other devices. Semiconductor devices include the transistor,
many kinds of diodes including the light-emitting diode, the silicon controlled
rectifier, and digital and analog integrated circuits.
Solar photovoltaic panels are large semiconductor devices that directly
convert light energy into electrical energy. In a metallic conductor, current is
carried by the flow of electrons. In semiconductors, current can be carried either
by the flow of electrons or by the flow of positively-charged "holes" in the electron
structure of the material. A semiconductor is a material that has a resistivity
value between that of a conductor and an insulator.
The conductivity of a semiconductor material can be varied under an
external electrical field. Devices made from semiconductor materials are the
foundation of modern electronics, including radio, computers, telephones, and
many other devices. Semiconductor devices include the transistor, many kinds of
diodes including the light-emitting diode, the silicon controlled rectifier, and digital
and analog integrated circuits. Solar photovoltaic panels are large semiconductor
devices that directly convert light energy into electrical energy. In a metallic
conductor, current is carried by the flow of electrons. In semiconductors, current
can be carried either by the flow of electrons or by the flow of positively-charged
"holes" in the electron structure of the material.
Silicon is used to create most semiconductors commercially. Dozens of other
materials are used, including germanium, gallium arsenide, and silicon carbide. A
pure semiconductor is often called an “intrinsic” semiconductor. The conductivity,
or ability to conduct, of semiconductor material can be drastically changed by
adding other elements, called “impurities” to the melted intrinsic material and then
allowing the melt to solidify into a new and different crystal. This process is called
"doping".

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
The unidirectional most diodes exhibit is sometimes generically called the
rectifying property. The most common function of a diode is to allow an electric
current in one direction (called the forward biased condition) and to block the
current in the opposite direction (the reverse biased condition).

Diodes

Example:

Circuit symbol:

Other terms

 A p–n junction is a junction formed by combining P-type and N-type


semiconductors together in very close contact. N-type composes of
electron or Negative and P-type compose of hole or Positive.

 The term junction refers to the region where the two regions of the
semiconductor meet. It can be thought of as the border region between
the p-type and n-type blocks

Example of a circuit is composing of a load, path, switch and source.


As state from the previous lesson that current flow start from negative to positive,
the electron moves from negative terminal of the source flowing to the path going
to the switch; the switch state at open so that the electron will not meet the
positive terminal, so the load would not be active or light.

e
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
At a time we close the switch, the electron passing through to the switch and
going to the load (Bulb) and positive terminal and the bulb will start to give a light.
e
e
+

-
e
e
e e

When we add to the circuit a semiconductor materials that the time circuit
will control the flow of current or electron to the circuits.
N-Types Materials

e e e
e e e
+ +

- -

N-Types contain electron “e”, when we close the circuit that is the time start
to flow the current or electron to the switch and load, and when they reach the N-
type material the electron inside the semiconductor will push (because base on the
law of magnetism when the pole is like sign – to –; or + to + they will repel) going to
the other side so that the electron will passing through to the semiconductor
materials until they reach the positive terminal. So that our bulb will give lights.
Therefore our N-Types materials are a LOW Resistance or Conductive materials or
called “Conductor”, because our current or electron is passing through.

e e
e ee
ee e
+ e

-
e e
e e
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
P-Types Materials

o o o
o o o
+ +

- -

P-Types contain Hole“o”, when we close the circuit and start to flow the
current or electron to the switch and load, and when they reach the P-type
material the hole inside the semiconductor will pull (because base on the law of
magnetism when the pole is unlike sign – to +; or – to + they will attract) going to
the side so that the electron will not pass to the semiconductor materials. So that
our bulb will not lights. Therefore our P-Types materials are a HIGH Resistance or
Insulated materials or called “Insulator”, because our current or electron are not
passing.

oo e
o
e
oo
o
+

-
e e
e e

When combining the N-type and P-type materials is become a semiconductor


component that we called DIODE. Diode component is act like a conductor and
insulator in the circuits. P-Type N-Type
o o o e e e
o o o e e e
+ +

- -

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
When the diode connected to the circuits, here are the operation inside the
diode that why they become a conductor or insulator.

Here are what happen to the electron and hole of the semiconductor, when
we connect the diode like shown below; the current or electron will flow to the
entire circuits because the electron inside the semiconductor will push going to the
center and the hole will attract going to the center too, so that the region will
become thin and the current or electron will passing to the diode. That the time
our diode become a LOW Resistance or a Conductor.
This connection of a diode is the negative source terminal is connected to the
N-types and the positive source terminal is connected to the P-types. This we
called Forward Bias.
Region

P-Type N-Type
ee e
oo
o e
e
e
oo ee
+ o e

- e

e e e

The other connection of the diode is the negative source terminal is


connected to the P-types and the positive source terminal is connected to the N-
types as shown below. This we called Reverse Bias.
This case the electron is attracting by the positive terminal and the hole will
attract by the negative terminal that why the region of the diode become thick the
electron or current will not pass to the diode. That the time our diode become
HIGH Resistance or an Insulator.
ee oo
e o e
ee oo
o
+ e

- e Region

e Date Developed:
e eDocument No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Symbols and types

Rectifier Diode Zener Diode Schottky Diode Tunnel Diode

Photo Diode VARICAP or Silicon Control


Light Emitting VARACTOR Rectifier
Diode

Pictorial Diode

Function
Diodes allow electricity to flow in only one direction. The arrow of the circuit
symbol shows the direction in which the current can flow. Diodes are the electrical
version of a valve and early diodes were actually called valves.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Forward Voltage Drop
Electricity uses up a little energy pushing its way through the diode, rather like a
person pushing through a door with a
spring. This means that there is a small
voltage across a conducting diode, it is
called the forward voltage drop and is
about 0.7V for all normal diodes which are
made from silicon. The forward voltage drop
of a diode is almost constant whatever the
current passing through the diode so they
have a very steep characteristic (current-
voltage graph).

Reverse Voltage
When a reverse voltage is applied a perfect
diode does not conduct, but all real diodes leak a very tiny current of a few µA or
less. This can be ignored in most circuits because it will be very much smaller than
the current flowing in the forward direction. However, all diodes have a maximum
reverse voltage (usually 50V or more) and if this is exceeded the diode will fail and
pass a large current in the reverse direction, this is called breakdown.

Ordinary diodes can be split into two types: Signal diodes which pass small
currents of 100mA or less and Rectifier diodes which can pass large currents. In
addition there are LEDs (which have their own page) and Zener diodes (at the
bottom of this page).

Connecting and soldering


Diodes must be connected the correct way round, the
diagram may be labeled a or+ for anode and k or - for
cathode (yes, it really is k, not c, for cathode!). The
cathode is marked by a line painted on the body.
Diodes are labeled with their code in small print, you may
need a magnifying glass to read this on small signal
diodes!

Small signal diodes can be damaged by heat when


soldering, but the risk is small unless you are using a germanium diode (codes
beginning OA...) in which case you should use a heat sink clipped to the lead

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
between the joint and the diode body. A standard crocodile clip can be used as a
heat sink.

Rectifier diodes are quite robust and no special precautions are needed for
soldering them.

Testing diodes
You can use a multi meter or a simple tester (battery, resistor and LED) to check
that a diode conducts in one direction but not the other. A lamp may be used to
test a rectifier diode, but do NOT use a lamp to test a signal diode because the
large current passed by the lamp will
destroy the diode!

• Procedure
1. Connect the positive test probe to
the cathode terminal of a diode
and the negative test probe to the
anode terminal of a diode.
2. You got a measure of a high
resistance or there is no deflection.
3. This is we called Reverse Bias.
Note: Some of the Multi meter are
Reverse Polarity

• Procedure
1. Connect the positive test probe to
the anode terminal of a diode and
the negative test probe to the
cathode terminal of a diode.
2. You got a measure of a Low
resistance or there is a deflection.
3. This is we called Forward Bias.
Note: Some of the Multi meter are
Reverse Polarity

Signal diodes (small current)


Signal diodes are used to process information (electrical signals) in circuits, so they
are only required to pass small currents of up to 100mA.
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
General purpose signal diodes such as the 1N4148 are made from silicon and have
a forward voltage drop of 0.7V.

Germanium diodes such as the OA90 have a lower forward voltage drop of 0.2V
and this makes them suitable to use in radio circuits as detectors which extract
the audio signal from the weak radio signal.

For general use, where the size of the forward voltage drop is less important,
silicon diodes are better because they are less easily damaged by heat when
soldering, they have a lower resistance when conducting, and they have very low
leakage currents when a reverse voltage is applied.

Protection diodes for relays


Signal diodes are also used to protect
transistors and ICs from the brief high
voltage produced when a relay coil is
switched off. The diagram shows how a
protection diode is connected
'backwards' across the relay coil.

Current flowing through a relay coil


creates a magnetic field which collapses
suddenly when the current is switched off.
The sudden collapse of the magnetic
field induces a brief high voltage across the relay coil which is very likely to
damage transistors and ICs. The protection diode allows the induced voltage to
drive a brief current through the coil (and diode) so the magnetic field dies away
quickly rather than instantly. This prevents the induced voltage becoming high
enough to cause damage to transistors and ICs.

Maximum
Rectifier diodes (large current) Maximum
Diode Reverse
Rectifier diodes are used in power supplies to Current
Voltage
convert alternating current (AC) to direct current
1N4001 1A 50V
(DC), a process called rectification. They are also
used elsewhere in circuits where a large current 1N4002 1A 100V
must pass through the diode. 1N4007 1A 1000V
1N5401 3A 100V
All rectifier diodes are made from silicon and
therefore have a forward voltage drop of 0.7V. The 1N5408 3A 1000V
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
table shows maximum current and maximum reverse voltage for some popular
rectifier diodes. The 1N4001 is suitable for most low voltage circuits with a current
of less than 1A.

Bridge rectifiers
There are several ways of connecting diodes
to make a rectifier to convert AC to DC. The
bridge rectifier is one of them and it is
available in special packages containing the
four diodes required. Bridge rectifiers are
rated by their maximum current and
maximum reverse voltage. They have four
leads or terminals: the two DC outputs are labeled + and -, the two AC inputs are
labeled .

The diagram shows the operation of a bridge rectifier as it converts AC to DC.


Notice how alternate pairs of diodes conduct.

Various types of Bridge Rectifiers


Note that some have a hole through their centre for attaching to a heat sink

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Self-Check #1.3-1J

LO3. IDENTIFY ELECTRONIC SYMBOLS AND INTERPRET SCHEMATIC


DIAGRAMS AND PARTS LIST

Multiple Choices: Choose the correct letters that best describe the statement.
Write your answers in capital letter on your answer sheet.

1. This is a material that has a resistivity value between that of a conductor


and an insulator.
A. Insulator
B. Semiconductor
C. Conductor
D. None of the above

2. N-type is containing of ____________.


A. Electron
B. Hole
C. Insulator
D. Conductor

3. Diode is to allow an electric current in one direction is called.


A. Electron
B. Hole
C. Forward Bias
D. Reverse Bias

4. P-type is containing of ____________.


A. Electron
B. Hole
C. Insulator
D. Conductor

5. Diode is to block the current in the opposite direction is called.


A. Electron
B. Hole
C. Forward Bias
D. Reverse Bias

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
ANSWER KEY #1.3-1J
Self-Check of #1.3-1J

LO1. ANALYZE AND INTERPRET ELECTRONICS COMPONENT

1. B
2. A
3. C
4. B
5. D

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
TASK SHEET 1.3-1J

Title: Diode Checking

Performance Objective: The trainee must be able to check the component


and measured the resistance.

Supplies/Materials : Paper, Ballpen

Equipment : Multi-meter, Diodes (4 pcs.)

Steps/Procedure:

A. Prepare the following Materials


B. Arrange the component by number.
C. Read the value of the diode.
D. Measured the resistance of each.
E. Record the measured value by fill-up the table.
F. Table A:

Resistance
Diode
Value Types Condition
No.
Forward Reverse
Bias Bias
D1
D2
D3
D4
Assessment Method:

Demonstration, Evaluate Using Performance criteria checklist

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Performance Criteria Checklist
Task Sheet #1.3-1J

CRITERIA YES NO
Did I..
1. Explain the function of diode in circuit?
2. Identify the different type of diode??
3. Check the diode?
4. Safety precautions and procedures observed?

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Information Sheet # 1.3-1K

LO3. IDENTIFY ELECTRONIC SYMBOLS AND INTERPRET SCHEMATIC


DIAGRAMS AND PARTS LIST

Learning Objectives: In an electronics shop scenario, the trainees will be able to


explain the function of a diode in a circuit and to identify the different types and
application, with-in 25 minutes.

Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

Example: Circuit symbol:

Function
LEDs emit light when an electric current passes through them.
Connecting and soldering
LEDs must be connected the correct way round, the
diagram may be labeled a or+ for anode and k or - for cathode
(yes, it really is k, not c, for cathode!). The cathode is the short
lead and there may be a slight flat on the body of round LEDs.
If you can see inside the LED the cathode is the larger electrode (but this is not an
official identification method).
LEDs can be damaged by heat when soldering, but the risk is small unless
you are very slow. No special precautions are needed for soldering most LEDs.

Testing an LED
Never connect an LED directly to a battery or power
supply!
It will be destroyed almost instantly because too much
current will pass through and burn it out.
LEDs must have a resistor in series to limit the current to
a safe value, for quick testing purposes a 1k resistor is
suitable for most LEDs if your supply voltage is 12V or
less. Remember to connect the LED the correct way round!

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Colors’ of LEDs
LEDs are available in red, orange,
amber, yellow, green, and blue and white.
Blue and white LEDs are much more
expensive than the other colors’.
The color of an LED is determined by the semiconductor material, not by the
coloring of the 'package' (the plastic body). LEDs of all colors’ are available in
uncolored packages which may be diffused (milky) or clear (often described as
'water clear'). The colored packages are also available as diffused (the standard
type) or transparent.

Tri-color LEDs
The most popular type of tri-color LED has a red and a green
LED combined in one package with three leads. They are called tri-
color because mixed red and green light appears to be yellow and this
is produced when both the red and green LEDs are on.
The diagram shows the construction of a tri-color LED. Note
the different lengths of the three leads. The centre lead (k) is the
common cathode for both LEDs; the outer leads (a1 and a2) are the
anodes to the LEDs allowing each one to be lit separately, or both
together to give the third color.
Bi-color LEDs
A bi-color LED has two LEDs wired in 'inverse parallel' (one forwards, one
backwards) combined in one package with two leads. Only one of the LEDs can be
lit at one time and they are less useful than the tri-color LEDs described above.

Sizes, Shapes and Viewing angles of LEDs


LEDs are available in a wide variety of sizes and shapes.
The 'standard' LED has a round cross-section of 5mm diameter
and this is probably the best type for general use, but 3mm round
LEDs are also popular.
Round cross-section LEDs are frequently used and they are
very easy to install on boxes by drilling a hole of the LED LED Clip
diameter, adding a spot of glue will help to hold the LED if
necessary. LED clips are also available to secure LEDs in holes.
Other cross-section shapes include square, rectangular and triangular.
As well as a variety of colors’, sizes and shapes, LEDs also vary in their
viewing angle. This tells you how much the beam of light spreads out. Standard
LEDs have a viewing angle of 60° but others have a narrow beam of 30° or less.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Calculating an LED resistor value

An LED must have a resistor connected in series to


limit the current through the LED; otherwise it will
burn out almost instantly.

The resistor value, R is given by:

R = (VS - VL) / I
VS = supply voltage
VL = LED voltage (usually 2V, but 4V for blue and white LEDs)
I = LED current (e.g. 10mA = 0.01A, or 20mA = 0.02A)
Make sure the LED current you choose is less than the maximum permitted and
convert the current to amps (A) so the calculation will give the resistor value in
ohms ( ).
To convert mA to A divide the current in mA by 1000 because 1mA = 0.001A.
If the calculated value is not available choose the nearest standard resistor value
which is greater, so that the current will be a little less than you chose. In fact you
may wish to choose a greater resistor value to reduce the current (to increase
battery life for example) but this will make the LED less bright.
For example
If the supply voltage VS = 9V, and you have a red LED (VL = 2V), requiring a
current I = 20mA = 0.020A,
R = (9V - 2V) / 0.02A = 350 , so choose 390 (the nearest standard value which
is greater).
Working out the LED resistor formula using Ohm's law
Ohm's law says that the resistance of the resistor, R = V/I, where:
V = voltage across the resistor (= VS - VL in this case)
I = the current through the resistor

So R = (VS - VL) / I

For more information on the calculations please see the Ohm's Law page.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Connecting LEDs in series
If you wish to have several LEDs on at the
same time it may be possible to connect them in
series. This prolongs battery life by lighting several
LEDs with the same current as just one LED.
All the LEDs connected in series pass the
same current so it is best if they are all the same
type. The power supply must have sufficient voltage
to provide about 2V for each LED (4V for blue and
white) plus at least another 2V for the resistor. To
work out a value for the resistor you must add up
all the LED voltages and use this for VL.
Example calculations:
A red, a yellow and a green LED in series need a supply voltage of at least
3 × 2V + 2V = 8V, so a 9V battery would be ideal.
VL = 2V + 2V + 2V = 6V (the three LED voltages added up).
If the supply voltage VS is 9V and the current I must be 15mA = 0.015A,
Resistor R = (VS - VL) / I = (9 - 6) / 0.015 = 3 / 0.015 = 200 ,
so choose R = 220 (the nearest standard value which is greater).

Avoid connecting LEDs in parallel!


Connecting several LEDs in parallel with just one resistor
shared between them is generally not a good idea.
If the LEDs require slightly different voltages only the lowest
voltage LED will light and it may be destroyed by the larger
current flowing through it. Although identical LEDs can be
successfully connected in parallel with one resistor this rarely
offers any useful benefit because resistors are very cheap and
the current used is the same as connecting the LEDs individually. If LEDs are in
parallel each one should have its own resistor.

Reading a table of technical data for LEDs

Suppliers' catalogues usually include tables of technical data for components


such as LEDs. These tables contain a good deal of useful information in a compact
form but they can be difficult to understand if you are not familiar with the
abbreviations used.
The table below shows typical technical data for some 5mm diameter round
LEDs with diffused packages (plastic bodies). Only three columns are important
and these are shown in bold. Please see below for explanations of the quantities.
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
IF VF VF VR Luminous Viewing
Type Color Wavelength
max. typ. max. max. intensity angle
5mcd @
Standard Red 30mA 1.7V 2.1V 5V 60° 660nm
10mA
Bright 80mcd @
Standard 30mA 2.0V 2.5V 5V 60° 625nm
red 10mA
32mcd @
Standard Yellow 30mA 2.1V 2.5V 5V 60° 590nm
10mA
32mcd @
Standard Green 25mA 2.2V 2.5V 5V 60° 565nm
10mA
High 60mcd @
Blue 30mA 4.5V 5.5V 5V 50° 430nm
intensity 20mA
Super 500mcd @
Red 30mA 1.85V 2.5V 5V 60° 660nm
bright 20mA
Low
Red 30mA 1.7V 2.0V 5V 5mcd @ 2mA 60° 625nm
current
IF max. Maximum forward current, forward just means with the LED
connected correctly.
VF typ. Typical forward voltage, VL in the LED resistor calculation.
This is about 2V, except for blue and white LEDs for which it is
about 4V.
VF max. Maximum forward voltage.
VR max. Maximum reverse voltage
You can ignore this for LEDs connected the correct way round.
Luminous Brightness of the LED at the given current, mcd = millicandela.
intensity
Viewing angle Standard LEDs have a viewing angle of 60°; others emit a
narrower beam of about 30°.
Wavelength The peak wavelength of the light emitted, this determines the
color of the LED.
nm = nanometre.

Flashing LEDs
Flashing LEDs look like ordinary LEDs but they contain an integrated circuit (IC)
as well as the LED itself. The IC flashes the LED at a low frequency, typically 3Hz
(3 flashes per second). They are designed to be connected directly to a supply,
usually 9 - 12V, and no series resistor is required. Their flash frequency is fixed so
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
their use is limited and you may prefer to build your own circuit to flash an
ordinary LED, for example our Flashing LED project which uses a 555 astable
circuit.

LED Displays
LED displays are packages of many LEDs arranged in a pattern, the most familiar
pattern being the 7-segment displays for showing numbers (digits 0-9). The
pictures below illustrate some of the popular designs:

Bargraph 7-segment Starburst Dot matrix

Pin connections of LED displays

There are many types of LED display and a


supplier's catalogue should be consulted for the pin
connections. The diagram on the right shows an
example. Like many 7-segment displays, this
example is available in two versions: Common
Anode (SA) with all the LED anodes connected
together and Common Cathode (SC) with all the
cathodes connected together. Letters a-g refer to the
7 segments, A/C is the common anode or cathode Pin connections diagram
as appropriate (on 2 pins). Note that some pins are
not present (NP) but their position is still numbered.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Self-Check #1.3-1K

LO3. IDENTIFY ELECTRONIC SYMBOLS AND INTERPRET SCHEMATIC


DIAGRAMS AND PARTS LIST

Multiple Choices: Choose the correct letters that best describe the statement.
Write your answers in capital letter on your answer sheet.

1. This is emitting light when an electric current passes through them.


A. Rectifier Diode
B. Zener
C. Light Emitting Diode
D. None of the above

2. Anode terminal of LED is ____________.


A. Positive
B. Negative
C. Insulator
D. Conductor

3. The mixed of red and green light appears to be yellow and this is produced
when both the red and green LEDs are on.
A. Lamp
B. LED
C. Bi-color LED’s
D. Tri-color LED’s

4. This type of LED’s would display 0-9 only.


A. Bargraph
B. Starburst
C. 7-segment
D. DOT matrix

5. Cathode terminal of LED is ____________.


A. Positive
B. Negative
C. Insulator
D. Conductor

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
ANSWER KEY #1.3-1K
Self-Check of #1.3-1K

LO3. IDENTIFY ELECTRONIC SYMBOLS AND INTERPRET SCHEMATIC


DIAGRAMS AND PARTS LIST

1. C
2. A
3. D
4. C
5. B

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
TASK SHEET 1.3-1K

Title: LED Checking

Performance Objective: The trainee must be able to check the


component and measured the resistance.

Supplies/Materials : Paper, Ballpen

Equipment : Multi-meter, LED (4 pcs.) and 7-segment

Steps/Procedure:

A. Prepare the following Materials


B. Arrange the component by number.
C. Measured the resistance of each.
D. Record the measured value by fill-up the table.
E. Table A:

Resistance
Diode
LED’s Colors Condition
No.
Forward Reverse
Bias Bias
D1
D2
D3
D4

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
F. 7-segment pin connection; to be familiarize the pin
configuration of a 7-segment. Using
tester test each pin which segment Pin LED
will light on and fill the corresponding number Letters
letter. 1
2
3
1 5 a 4
f b 5
6
g
7
e c 8
10 6
d 9
dp
10

G. If the supply voltage VS = 220V, and you have a red LED (VL =
3.3V), requiring a current I = 20mA. How much the required
resistance of the resistor need in the
circuit.

Assessment Method:

Demonstration, Evaluate Using Performance criteria checklist


Performance Criteria Checklist
Task Sheet #1.3-1K

CRITERIA YES NO
Did I..
1. Explain the function of LED in circuit?
2. Identify the different type of LED’s??
3. Checking Light Emitting Diode?
4. Safety precautions and procedures observed?
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Information Sheet # 1.3-1L

LO3. IDENTIFY ELECTRONIC SYMBOLS AND INTERPRET SCHEMATIC


DIAGRAMS AND PARTS LIST

Learning Objectives: In an electronics shop scenario, the trainees will be able to


identify different types of a transistor and explain the function of a transistor in a
circuit, with-in 25 minutes.

Transistors
This page covers practical matters such as precautions when soldering and
identifying leads. The operation and use of transistors is covered by the
Transistor Circuits page.

In electronics, a transistor is a semiconductor device commonly used to


amplify or switch electronic signals. A transistor is made of a solid piece of a
semiconductor material, with at least three terminals for connection to an external
circuit.
A voltage or current applied to one pair of the transistor's terminals changes
the current flowing through another pair of terminals. Because the controlled
(output) power can be much larger than the controlling (input) power, the
transistor provides amplification of a signal.

Function
Transistors amplify current, for example they can be used to
amplify the small output current from a logic IC so that it can
operate a lamp, relay or other high current device. In many
circuits a resistor is used to convert the changing current to a
changing voltage, so the transistor is being used to amplify
voltage.

A transistor may be used as a switch (either fully on with maximum current, or


fully off with no current) and as an amplifier (always partly on).

The amount of current amplification is called the current gain, symbol hFE.
For further information please see the Transistor Circuits page.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Types of transistor
There are two types of standard
transistors, NPN and PNP, with
different circuit symbols. The letters
refer to the layers of semiconductor
material used to make the transistor.
Most transistors used today are NPN
because this is the easiest type to
make from silicon. If you are new to Transistor circuit symbols
electronics it is best to start by
learning how to use NPN transistors.

The leads are labeled base (B), collector (C) and emitter (E). The Base serve as
the input side or gate of the transistor, Collector serve as the output side or
drain of the transistor and the Emitter is serve as the source or supply side of
the transistor.

A Darlington pair is two transistors connected together to give a very high current
gain.

In addition to standard (bipolar junction) transistors, there are field-effect


transistors which are usually referred to as FETs. They have different circuit
symbols and properties and they are not (yet) covered by this module.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Connecting
Transistors have three leads which
must be connected the correct way
round. Please take care with this
because a wrongly connected
transistor may be damaged
instantly when you switch on.

If you are lucky the orientation of


the transistor will be clear from the
PCB or strip board layout diagram,
otherwise you will need to refer to
a supplier's catalogue to identify
the leads.

The drawings on the right show the


leads for some of the most common Transistor leads for some common case styles.
case styles.

Please note that transistor lead diagrams show the view from below with the leads
towards you. This is the opposite of IC (chip) pin diagrams which show the view
from above.

Soldering
Transistors can be damaged by heat when soldering so if you
are not an expert it is wise to use a heat sink clipped to the
lead between the joint and the transistor body. A standard
crocodile clip can be used as a heat sink. Crocodile clip.

Do not confuse this temporary heat sink with the permanent


heat sink (described below) which may be required for a power transistor to
prevent it overheating during operation.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Heat sinks
Waste heat is produced in transistors due to the current flowing
through them. Heat sinks are needed for power transistors because
they pass large currents. If you find that a transistor is becoming too
hot to touch it certainly needs a heat sink! The heat sink helps to
dissipate (remove) the heat by transferring it to the surrounding air. Heat sink
Testing a transistor
Transistors can be damaged by heat when soldering or by misuse in a circuit. If
you suspect that a transistor may be damaged there
are two easy ways to test it:

1. Testing with a multi-meter


Use a multi-meter or a simple tester (battery, resistor
and LED) to check each pair of leads for conduction.
Set a digital multi-meter to diode test and an analogue
multi-meter to a low resistance range.

Test each pair of leads both ways (six tests in total):


Testing an NPN transistor
The base-emitter (BE) junction should behave
like a diode and conduct one way only.
The base-collector (BC) junction should behave like a diode and conduct
one way only.
The collector-emitter (CE) should not conduct either way.

The diagram shows how the junctions behave in an NPN transistor. The diodes are
reversed in a PNP transistor but the same test procedure can be used.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Note: Some of the Multi meter are Reverse Polarity

Figure A Figure B

2. Pin and types identification using multi-meter


Using a multi-meter we could identify the Base, Emitter and Collector and
types of transistor, just follow this procedure; range your tester in Rx1 and follow
transistor checking like in figure 1. We all know that our base is the common
terminal of the transistor; so if we test the transistor, we can observe two
deflections in our tester like in figure 1. So that pin 1 is our base.

Figure 1
Forward Forward
Bias Low Bias Low
Resistance Resistance

1 2 3

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
And then to find out which is the collector and emitter; range our multi-
meter to Rx10k. Connect test prod to two remaining pins; pin 2 and 3 like in figure
2. Then observe the pointer who’s no deflection. And look for the red test
prod/probe that pointing the collector pin that is pin 2, so pin 3 is emitter.

Figure 2

Forward Reverse
Bias Low Bias High
Resistance Resistance

1 2 3

Note: This procedure is for PNP type’s


transistor; for NPN types transistor same procedure but you may observe the
black test prod/probe that who’s pointing the Base and Collector pins.
To identify the types of the transistor thered test prod/probepointing the
base the types is PNP, while black test prod/probe pointing the base the types is
NPN.

3. Testing in a simple switching circuit


Connect the transistor into the circuit shown on the
right which uses the transistor as a switch. The supply
voltage is not critical; anything between 5 and 12V is
suitable. This circuit can be quickly built on
breadboard for example. Take care to include the 10k
resistor in the base connection or you will destroy the
transistor as you test it!

If the transistor is OK the LED should light when the


switch is pressed and not light when the switch is
released. A simple switching circuit
to test an NPN transistor
To test a PNP transistor use the same circuit but
reverse the LED and the supply voltage.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Some multi-meters have a 'transistor test' function which provides a known base
current and measures the collector current so as to display the transistor's DC
current gain hFE.

Transistor codes
There are three main series of transistor codes used in the UK:

Codes beginning with B (or A), for example BC108, BC478


The first letter B is for silicon, A is for germanium (rarely used now). The
second letter indicates the type; for example C means low power audio
frequency; D means high power audio frequency; F means low power high
frequency. The rest of the code identifies the particular transistor. There is
no obvious logic to the numbering system. Sometimes a letter is added to the
end (eg BC108C) to identify a special version of the main type, for example a
higher current gain or a different case style. If a project specifies a higher
gain version (BC108C) it must be used, but if the general code is given
(BC108) any transistor with that code is suitable.
Codes beginning with TIP, for example TIP31A
TIP refers to the manufacturer: Texas Instruments Power transistor. The
letter at the end identifies versions with different voltage ratings.
Codes beginning with 2N, for example 2N3053
The initial '2N' identifies the part as a transistor and the rest of the code
identifies the particular transistor. There is no obvious logic to the
numbering system.

Choosing a transistor
Most projects will specify a particular transistor, but if necessary you can usually
substitute an equivalent transistor from the wide range available. The most
important properties to look for are the maximum collector current IC and the
current gain hFE. To make selection easier most suppliers group their transistors in
categories determined either by their typical use or maximum power rating.

To make a final choice you will need to consult the tables of technical data which
are normally provided in catalogues. They contain a great deal of useful
information but they can be difficult to understand if you are not familiar with the
abbreviations used. The table below shows the most important technical data for
some popular transistors, tables in catalogues and reference books will usually

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
show additional information but this is unlikely to be useful unless you are
experienced. The quantities shown in the table are explained below.

NPN transistors
Category Possible
Case IC VCE hFE Ptot
Code Structure (typical substitut
style max. max. min. max.
use) es
Audio, low BC182
BC107 NPN TO18 100mA 45V 110 300mW
power BC547
General BC108C
BC108 NPN TO18 100mA 20V 110 300mW purpose, BC183
low power BC548
General
BC108C NPN TO18 100mA 20V 420 600mW purpose,
low power
Audio (low
BC184
BC109 NPN TO18 200mA 20V 200 300mW noise), low
BC549
power
General
BC107
BC182 NPN TO92C 100mA 50V 100 350mW purpose,
BC182L
low power
General
BC107
BC182L NPN TO92A 100mA 50V 100 350mW purpose,
BC182
low power
Audio, low
BC547B NPN TO92C 100mA 45V 200 500mW BC107B
power
General
BC548B NPN TO92C 100mA 30V 220 500mW purpose, BC108B
low power
Audio (low
BC549B NPN TO92C 100mA 30V 240 625mW noise), low BC109
power
General
2N3053 NPN TO39 700mA 40V 50 500mW purpose, BFY51
low power
General
BFY51 NPN TO39 1A 30V 40 800mW BC639
purpose,
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
medium
power
General
purpose,
BC639 NPN TO92A 1A 80V 40 800mW BFY51
medium
power
General
TIP29A NPN TO220 1A 60V 40 30W purpose,
high power
General
TIP31C
TIP31A NPN TO220 3A 60V 10 40W purpose,
TIP41A
high power
General
TIP31A
TIP31C NPN TO220 3A 100V 10 40W purpose,
TIP41A
high power
General
TIP41A NPN TO220 6A 60V 15 65W purpose,
high power
General
2N3055 NPN TO3 15A 60V 20 117W purpose,
high power
Please note: the data in this table was compiled from several sources which
are not entirely consistent! Most of the discrepancies are minor, but please
consult information from your supplier if you require precise data.
PNP transistors
Category Possible
Case IC VCE hFE Ptot
Code Structure (typical substitut
style max. max. min. max.
use) es
Audio, low
BC177 PNP TO18 100mA 45V 125 300mW BC477
power
General
BC178 PNP TO18 200mA 25V 120 600mW purpose, BC478
low power
Audio (low
BC179 PNP TO18 200mA 20V 180 600mW noise), low
power
BC477 PNP TO18 150mA 80V 125 360mW Audio, low BC177
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
power
General
BC478 PNP TO18 150mA 40V 125 360mW purpose, BC178
low power
General
TIP32A PNP TO220 3A 60V 25 40W purpose, TIP32C
high power
General
TIP32C PNP TO220 3A 100V 10 40W purpose, TIP32A
high power
Please note: the data in this table was compiled from several sources which
are not entirely consistent! Most of the discrepancies are minor, but please
consult information from your supplier if you require precise data.

Structure This shows the type of transistor, NPN or PNP. The polarities
of the two types are different, so if you are looking for a
substitute it must be the same type.
Case style There is a diagram showing the leads for some of the most
common case styles in the Connecting section above. This
information is also available in suppliers' catalogues.
IC max. Maximum collector current.
VCE max. Maximum voltage across the collector-emitter junction.
You can ignore this rating in low voltage circuits.
hFE This is the current gain (strictly the DC current gain). The
guaranteed minimum value is given because the actual
value varies from transistor to transistor - even for those of
the same type! Note that current gain is just a number so it
has no units.
The gain is often quoted at a particular collector current IC
which is usually in the middle of the transistor's range, for
example '100@20mA' means the gain is at least 100 at
20mA. Sometimes minimum and maximum values are
given. Since the gain is roughly constant for various
currents but it varies from transistor to transistor this detail
is only really of interest to experts.
Why hFE? It is one of a whole series of parameters for

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
transistors, each with their own symbol. There are too many
to explain here.
Ptot max. Maximum total power which can be developed in the
transistor, note that a heat sink will be required to achieve
the maximum rating. This rating is important for transistors
operating as amplifiers; the power is roughly IC × VCE. For
transistors operating as switches the maximum collector
current (IC max.) is more important.
Category This shows the typical use for the transistor, it is a good
starting point when looking for a substitute. Catalogues may
have separate tables for different categories.
Possible substitutes These are transistors with similar electrical properties which
will be suitable substitutes in most circuits. However, they
may have a different case style so you will need to take care
when placing them on the circuit board.

Darlington pair
This is two transistors connected together so that the amplified current from the
first is amplified further by the second transistor. This gives the Darlington pair a
very high current gain such as 10000. Darlington pairs are sold as complete
packages containing the two transistors. They have three leads (B, C and E) which
are equivalent to the leads of a standard individual transistor.

You can make up your own Darlington pair from two


transistors. For
example:

For TR1 use BC548B with hFE1 = 220.


For TR2 use BC639 with hFE2 = 40.

The overall gain of this pair is hFE1 × hFE2 = 220 × 40 =


8800. The
pair's maximum collector current IC(max) is the same as
TR2.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Self-Check #1.3-1L

LO3. IDENTIFY ELECTRONIC SYMBOLS AND INTERPRET SCHEMATIC


DIAGRAMS AND PARTS LIST

Multiple Choices: Choose the correct letters that best describe the statement.
Write your answers in capital letter on your answer sheet.

1. Transistor is a three electrode namely;


A. Base
B. Collector
C. Emitter
D. All of the above

2. The output side of the transistor is ____________.


A. Base
B. Collector
C. Emitter
D. All of the above

3. The input side of the transistor is ____________.


A. Base
B. Collector
C. Emitter
D. All of the above

4. This component can amplify the signal.


A. Resistor
B. Transistor
C. Diode
D. Capacitor

5. The source side of the transistor is ____________.


A. Base
B. Collector
C. Emitter
D. All of the above

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
ANSWER KEY #1.3-1L
Self-Check of #1.3-1L

LO1. ANALYZE AND INTERPRET ELECTRONICS COMPONENT

1. D
2. B
3. A
4. B
5. C

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
TASK SHEET 1.3-1L

Title: Transistor Checking

Performance Objective: The trainee must be able to check the component and
measured the resistance.

Supplies/Materials : Paper, Ball pen

Equipment : Multi-meter, Transistor (4 pcs.)

Steps/Procedure:

A. Prepare the following Materials


B. Arrange the component by number.
C. Read the value of the transistor.
D. Measured the resistance of each.
E. Record the measured value by fill-up the table.
F. Table A: Transistor Checking

Resistance
Transisto
Description Types Condition
r No.
Forwar Revers
d Bias e Bias
Q1

Q2

Q3

Q4

G. Measure the resistance of the transistor and identify the Base, Emitter

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
and Collector
H. Table B: Configuration.
Resistance Pin
Transisto Configuration
Description Pin No. Forwar Revers
r No. (Base, Emitter,
d Bias e Bias
Collector)
Q1 ED1402 1 - 2
1 - 3
2 - 3
Q2 C1061 1 - 2
1 - 3
2 - 3
Q3 A671 1 - 2
1 - 3
2 - 3

Assessment Method:

Demonstration, Evaluate Using Performance criteria checklist

Performance Criteria Checklist


Task Sheet #1.3-1L

CRITERIA YES NO
Did I..
1. Explain the function of transistor in circuit?
2. Identify the different type of transistor?
3. Identify the pin configuration of transistor?
4. Check the transistor?
5. Safety precautions and procedures observed?

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
PERFORMANCE TEST

Learner's Name Date


Competency: Electronics symbols and component Test Attempt
checking 1st 2nd 3rd

Directions: OVERALL EVALUATION

CALL INSTRUCTOR and ask Level


him/her to assess your Achie PERFORMANCE LEVELS
performance in the following ved
critical task and performance 4 - Can perform this skill without
criteria indicated below supervision and with initiative and
adaptability to problem situations.
You will be rated based on the 3 - Can perform this skill
overall evaluation outlined on satisfactorily without assistance or
the right side. supervision.
2 - Can perform this skill
satisfactorily but requires some
assistance and/or supervision.
1 - Can perform parts of this skill
satisfactorily, but requires
considerable assistance and/or
supervision.
Instructor will initial level achieved.

PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
For acceptable achievement, all items should receive a Yes No N/A
"Yes", “No” or "N/A" response.
Electronics components are identify
Functions of electronics componentare understood
Electronicscomponents is properly used
Properly check the condition of the electronics
components
Safety are apply while using electronics components
accordance to the OH&S

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Learning Outcome #4 Apply proper soldering and de-soldering techniques.

CONTENTS:

Isolation procedures
Gas and vapor
Use of protective equipment and clothing
Knowledge of proper handling and disposal of chemicals
Identifying and proper handling of electronic components
Identifying and proper handling of digital components
Fundamentals of ESD handling
Theories of lead-free solders
Fundamentals of soldering irons
Theories of PCB artwork
Fundamentals of soldering and desoldering
Work efficiently & systematically

CONDITIONS:

Students/trainees must be provided with the following:


Learning elements and manuals
Working area/bench
PPE

EQUIPMENT TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES

● Working area/bench ● Long-nose pliers


● Sufficient lighting and ● Diagonal cutters
ventilation system ● Standard screwdrivers
●Soldering iron, 30w
●De-soldering iron, 30w
●Screw driver assorted,
●Phillips, slotted
●Wrenches assorted
●Allen wrench/key
●Utility knife/stripper
●Pliers assorted, long
●nose, side cutter
●Test jig
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LEARNING MATERIALS

● Solder lead ● Books and references


●Cleaning brush ● Technical manuals
●lead free solder ● Documentation forms
●rosin core solder ● Report forms
●wire stranded, #22, ● Self-paced learning
●different colors) elements
●silicon grease ● CBLM
●resistors (different values)
●capacitors (different
●values)
●transformer
●Learning materials
●Books and references

METHODOLOGIES:

● Demonstration
Research work
Role-playing

ASSESSMENT METHODS:
Return demonstration
Oral and written examinations / Paper and Pen Test
Direct Observation/ Interview
Practical examination

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Learning Experiences

Learning Outcome 4

DETERMINE LEARNER’S TRAINING REQUIREMENTS

Learning Activities Special Instructions


1. Read Information Sheet # 1.4-1
On Soldering
2. Answer Self-Check # 1.4-1 Compare answer with Answer Key
3. Read Information Sheet # 1.4-1A
4. Answer Self-Check # 1.4-1A Compare answer with Answer Key
5. Perform Task Sheet # 1.4-1A Evaluate Using Performance criteria
checklist
6. Read Information Sheet #2.1-1B
7. Answer Self-Check #2.1-1B Compare answer with Answer Key

8. Read Information Sheet #2.1-1C


9.Read Information Sheet #2.1-1D
10. Answer Self-Check #2.1-1D Compare answer with Answer Key

11. Read Information Sheet #2.1-1E


12. Answer Self-Check #2.1-1E Compare answer with Answer Key
13. Read Information Sheet #2.1-1E
Evaluate Using Performance criteria
14. Perform Job Sheet #2.1-1 checklist
15. Assignment Sheet #2.2-1

16. Watch Video Clips This video clips will identify the specific
endangerments sites for the trainee to
apply safety and precaution on these
sites.

After doing all the activities of this LO,


you are ready to proceed to the next LO
on discuss the treatment strategy with
the client/patient.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Information Sheet # 1.4-1

LO4. APPLY PROPER SOLDERING AND DE-SOLDERING TECHNIQUES

Learning Objectives: In an electronics shop scenario, the trainee will be able to


apply proper soldering and de-soldering techniques in assembling and
disassembling consumer electronics products and systems with-in 25 minutes.

Soldering irons
The most fundamental skill needed to assemble any electronic project is that
of soldering. It takes some practice to make the perfect joint, but, like riding a
bicycle, once learned is never forgotten! The idea is simple: to join electrical parts
together to form an electrical connection, using a molten mixture of lead and tin
(solder*) with a soldering iron. A large range of soldering irons is available - which
one is suitable for you depend on your budget and how serious your interest in
electronics is.
[*Note: the use of lead in solder is now increasingly prohibited in many countries.
"Lead free" solder is now statutory instead.]
Electronics catalogues often include a selection of well-known brands of
soldering iron. Though it's possible to spend into three figures on a soldering iron
"station" if you're really serious! Check some suppliers' catalogues for some typical
types. Certain factors you need to bear in mind include:-
Voltage: most irons run from the mains at 240V. However, low voltage types (e.g.
12V or 24V) generally form part of a "soldering station" and are designed to be
used with a special controller made by the same manufacturer.
Wattage: Typically, they may have a power rating of between 15-25 watts or so,
which is fine for most work. A higher wattage does not mean that the iron runs
hotter - it simply means that there is more power in reserve for coping with larger
joints. This also depends partly on the design of the "bit" (the tip of the iron).
Consider a higher wattage iron simply as being more "unstoppable" when it comes
to heavier-duty work, because it won't cool down so quickly.
Temperature Control: the simplest and cheapest types don't have any form of
temperature regulation. Simply plug them in and switch them on! Thermal
regulation is "designed in" (by physics, not electronics!): they may be described as
"thermally balanced" so that they have some degree of temperature "matching" but
their output will otherwise not be controlled. Unregulated irons form an ideal
general purpose iron for most users, and they generally cope well with printed
circuit board soldering and general inter wiring. Most of these "miniature" types of
iron will be of little use when attempting to solder large joints (e.g. very large
terminals or very thick wires) because the component being soldered will "sink"
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
heat away from the tip of the iron, cooling it down too much. (This is where a
higher wattage comes in useful.)
A proper temperature-controlled iron will be quite a lot more expensive and
will have some form of built-in thermostatic control, to ensure that the
temperature of the bit (the tip of the iron) is maintained at a fixed level (within
limits). This is desirable especially during more frequent use, since it helps to
ensure that the temperature does not "overshoot" in between times, and also
guarantees that the output will be relatively stable. Some irons have a bimetallic
strip thermostat built into the handle which gives an audible "click" in use: other
types use all-electronic controllers, and some may be adjustable using a
screwdriver.
Yet more expensive still, soldering stations (the iron may be sold
separately, so you can pick the type you prefer), and consist of a complete bench-
top control unit into which a special low-voltage soldering iron is plugged. Some
versions might have built-in digital temperature readout, and will have a control
knob to enable you to vary the setting. The temperature could be boosted for
soldering larger joints, for example, or for using higher melting-point solders (e.g.
silver solder). These are designed for the most discerning users, or for continuous
production line/ professional use. The best stations have irons which are well
balanced, with comfort-grip handles which remain cool all day. A thermocouple
will be built into the tip or shaft, which monitors temperature.
Anti-static protection: if you're interested in soldering a lot of static-sensitive
parts (e.g. CMOS chips or MOSFET transistors), more advanced and expensive
soldering iron stations use static-dissipative materials in their construction to
ensure that static does not build up on the iron itself. You may see these listed as
"ESD safe" (electrostatic discharge proof). The cheapest irons won't necessarily be
ESD-safe but never the less will still probably perform perfectly well in most hobby
or educational applications, if you take the usual anti-static precautions when
handling the components. The tip would need to be well earthed (grounded) in
these circumstances.
Bits: it's useful to have a small selection of manufacturer's bits (soldering iron tips)
available with different diameters or shapes, which can be changed depending on
the type of work in hand. You'll probably find that you become accustomed to, and
work best with, a particular shape of tip. Often, tips are iron-coated to preserve
their life, or they may be bright-plated instead. Copper tips are seldom seen these
days.
Spare parts: it's nice to know that spare parts may be available, so if the element
blows, you don't need to replace the entire iron. This is especially so with expensive
irons. Check through some of the larger mail-order catalogues.
You will occasionally see gas-powered soldering irons which use butane
rather than the mains electrical supply to operate. They have a catalytic element
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
which, once warmed up, continues to glow hot when gas passes over them. Service
engineers use them for working on repairs where there may be no power available,
or where a joint is tricky to reach with a normal iron, so they are really for
occasional "on the spot" use for quick repairs, rather than for mainstream
construction or assembly work.
Another technique is the proprietary "Cold heat" battery powered soldering
iron. There are a number of reasons why this should only be used with extreme
care (if at all) on electronic circuit boards.
A solder gun is a pistol-shaped iron, typically running at 100W or more, and is
completely unsuitable for soldering modern electronic components: they're too hot,
heavy and unwieldy for micro-electronics use. Plumbing, maybe..!
Soldering irons are best used along with a heat-resistant bench-type holder, so
that the hot iron can be safely parked in between use. Soldering stations already
have this feature, otherwise a separate soldering iron stand is essential, preferably
one with a holder for tip-cleaning sponges. Now let's look at how to use soldering
irons properly, and how to put things right when a joint goes wrong.

How to solder
Turning to the actual techniques of soldering, firstly it's best to secure the
work somehow so that it doesn't move during soldering and affect your accuracy.
In the case of a printed circuit board, various holding frames are fairly popular
especially with densely populated boards: the idea is to insert all the parts on one
side ("stuffing the board"), hold them in place with a special foam pad to prevent
them falling out, turn the board over and then snip off the wires with cutters
before making the joints. The frame saves an awful lot of turning the board over
and over, especially with large boards. Other parts could be held firm in a
modeller's small vice, for example.
Solder joints may need to possess some degree of mechanical strength in
some cases, especially with wires soldered to, say, potentiometer or switch tags,
and this means that the wire should be looped through the tag and secured before
solder is applied. The down side is that it is more difficult to de-solder the joint (see
later) and remove the wire afterwards, if required. Otherwise, in the case of an
ordinary circuit board, components' wires are bent to fit through the board,
inserted flush against the board's surface, splayed outwards a little so that the
part grips the board, and then soldered.
In my view - opinions vary - it's generally better to snip the surplus wires
leads off first, to make the joint more accessible and avoid applying a mechanical
shock to the P.C.B. joint. However, in the case of semiconductors, I often tend to
leave the snipping until after the joint has been made, since the excess wire will
help to sink away some of the heat from the semiconductor junction. Integrated
circuits can either be soldered directly into place if you are confident enough, or
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
better, use a dual-in-line socket to prevent heat damage. The chip can then be
swapped out if needed.
Parts which become hot in operation (e.g. some resistors), are raised above
the board slightly to allow air to circulate. Some components, especially large
electrolytic capacitors, may require a mounting clip to be screwed down to the
board first; otherwise the part may eventually break off due to vibration.
The perfectly soldered joint will be nice and shiny looking, and will prove reliable in
service. I would say that:
cleanliness
temperature
time
adequate solder coverage
Are the key factors affecting the quality of the joint? A little effort spent now in
soldering the perfect joint may save you - or somebody else - a considerable
amount of time in troubleshooting a defective joint in the future. The basic
principles are as follows.
Really Clean
Firstly, and without exception, all parts - including the iron tip itself - must
be clean and free fromcontamination. Solder just will not "take" to dirty parts!
Old components or copper board can be notoriously difficult to solder, because of
the layer of oxidation which builds up on the surface of the leads. This repels the
molten solder and this will soon be evident because the solder will "bead" into
globules, going everywhere except where you need it. Dirt is the enemy of a good
quality soldered joint!
Hence, it is an absolute necessity to ensure that parts are free from grease,
oxidation and other contamination. In the case of old resistors or capacitors, for
example, where the leads have started to oxidize, use a small hand-held file or
perhaps scrape a knife blade or rub a fine emery cloth over them to reveal fresh
metal underneath. Strip board and copper printed circuit board will generally
oxidize after a few months, especially if it has been fingerprinted, and the copper
strips can be cleaned using an abrasive rubber block, like an aggressive eraser, to
reveal fresh shiny copper underneath.
Also available is a fiber-glass filament brush, which is used propelling-
pencil-like to remove any surface contamination. These tend to produce tiny
particles which are highly irritating to skin, so avoid accidental contact with any
debris. Afterwards, a wipe with a rag soaked in cleaning solvent will remove most
grease marks and fingerprints. After preparing the surfaces, avoid touching the
parts afterwards if at all possible.
Another side effect of having dirty surfaces is the tendency for people to want
to apply more heat in an attempt to "force the solder to take". This will often do
more harm than good because it may not be possible to burn off any contaminants
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
anyway, and the component may be overheated. In the case of semiconductors,
temperature is quite critical and they may be harmed by applying such excessive
heat.
Before using the iron to make a joint, it should be "tinned" (coated with
solder) by applying a few millimeters of solder, then wiped on a damp sponge
preparing it for use: you should always do this immediately with a new bit,
anyway. Personally, I always re-apply a very small amount of solder again, mainly
to improve the thermal contact between the iron and the joint, so that the solder
will flow more quickly and easily. It's sometimes better to tin larger parts as well
before making the joint itself, but it isn't generally necessary with P.C.B. work. (All
EPE printed circuit boards are "roller-tinned" to preserve their quality and to help
with soldering.) A worthwhile product is Weller's Tip Tinner& Cleaner, a small 15
gram tin let of paste onto which you dab a hot iron - the product cleans and tins
the iron ready for use. An equivalent is Ad cola Tip-Save.
Normal electronics grade solder is now "lead free" and typically contains Sn
97 Ag 2.5 Cu 0.5 (i.e. 97% tin, 2.5% silver and 0.5% copper). It already contains
cores of "flux" which helps the molten solder to flow more easily over the joint.
Flux removes oxides which arise during heating, and is seen as a brown fluid
bubbling away on the joint. The use of separate acid flux paste (e.g. as used by
plumbers) should NEVER be necessary in normal electronics applications because
electronics-grade solder already contains the correct grade of flux! Other solders
are available for specialist work, including aluminums and silver-solder. Different
solder diameters are produced, too; 20-22 SWG (19-21 AWG) is 0.91-0.71mm
diameter and is fine for most work. Choose 18 SWG (16 AWG) for larger joints
requiring more solder.
Temperature
Another step to successful soldering is to ensure that the temperature of all
the parts is raised to roughly the same level before applying solder. Imagine, for
instance, trying to solder a resistor into place on a printed circuit board: it's far
better to heat both the copper P.C.B. and the resistor lead at the same time before
applying solder, so that the solder will flow much more readily over the joint.
Heating one part but not the other is far less satisfactory joint, so strive to ensure
that the iron is in contact with all the components first, before touching the solder
to it. The melting point of most solder is in the region of 188°C (370°F) and the iron
tip temperature is typically 330-350°C (626°-662°F). The latest lead-free solders
typically require a higher temperature.
Now is the time
Next, the joint should be heated with the bit for just the right amount of
time - during which a short length of solder is applied to the joint. Do not use the
iron to carry molten solder over to the joint! Excessive time will damage the
component and perhaps the circuit board copper foil too! Heat the joint with the
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
tip of the iron, then continue heating whilst applying solder, then remove the iron
and allow the joint to cool. This should take only a few seconds, with experience.
The heating period depends on the temperature of your iron and size of the joint -
and larger parts need more heat than smaller ones - but some parts
(semiconductor diodes, transistors and i.c.s), are sensitive to heat and should not
be heated for more than a few seconds. Novices sometimes buy a small clip-on
heat-shunt, which resembles a pair of aluminums tweezers. In the case of, say, a
transistor, the shunt is attached to one of the leads near to the transistor's body.
Any excess heat then diverts up the heat shunt instead of into the transistor
junction, thereby saving the device from over-heating. Beginners find them
reassuring until they've gained more experience.
Solder Coverage
The final key to a successful solder joint is to apply an appropriate amount
of solder. Too much solder is an unnecessary waste and may cause short circuits
with adjacent joints. Too little and it may not support the component properly, or
may not fully form a working joint. How much to apply, only really comes with
practice. A few millimeters only, are enough for an "average" P.C.B. joint, (if there
is such a thing).

What is solder?
Solder is an alloy (mixture) of tin and lead,
typically 60% tin and 40% lead. It melts at a
temperature of about 200°C. Coating a surface with
solder is called 'tinning' because of the tin content of
solder. Lead is poisonous and you should always wash
your hands after using solder.
Solder for electronics use contains tiny cores of
flux, like the wires inside a mains flex. The flux is
corrosive, like an acid, and it cleans the metal surfaces Reels of Solder
as the solder melts. This is why you must melt the
solder actually on the joint, not on the iron tip. Without flux most joints would fail
because metals quickly oxidize and the solder itself will not flow properly onto a
dirty, oxidized, metal surface.
The best size of solder for electronics is 22swg (SWG = standard wire gauge).

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Self-Check #1.4-1

LO4. APPLY PROPER SOLDERING AND DE-SOLDERING TECHNIQUES

Multiple Choices: Choose the correct letter that best describes the statement.
Write your answers in capital letter on your answer sheet.

1. What are the factors affecting the good soldered joint.


A. Cleanliness
B. Temperature
C. Soldering
D. A and B

2. A good solder mixture is.


A. 60% tin
B. 40% tin and 60% lead
C. 60% tin and 40% lead
D. 40% lead

3. This tool is use for joining the two terminals.


A. Screw Driver
B. Solder
C. Solder Wick
D. Soldering Iron

4. This are used for joining, it composed of tin and lead.


A. PCB Holder
B. PCB Rubber
C. Reel of Solder
D. Solder Wick

5. The melting point of a good solder is around.


A. 200°C
B. 250°C
C. 350°C
D. 275°C

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
ANSWER KEY #1.4-1
Self-Check of #1.4-1

LO4. APPLY PROPER SOLDERING AND DE-SOLDERING TECHNIQUES

1. D
2. C
3. D
4. C
5. A

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Information Sheet # 1.4-1A

LO4. APPLY PROPER SOLDERING AND DE-SOLDERING TECHNIQUES

Learning Objectives: In an electronics shop scenario, the trainee will be able to


apply proper soldering and de-soldering techniques in assembling and
disassembling consumer electronics products and systems with-in 25 minutes.

Soldering Guide
How to Solder
First a few safety precautions:
Never touch the element or tip of the soldering iron.
They are very hot (about 400°C) and will give you a nasty burn.
Take great care to avoid touching the mains flex with the tip of the
iron.
The iron should have a heatproof flex for extra protection. An ordinary
plastic flex will melt immediately if touched by a hot iron and there is a
serious risk of burns and electric shock.
Always return the soldering iron to its stand when not in use.
Never put it down on your workbench, even for a moment!
Work in a well-ventilated area.
The smoke formed as you melt solder is mostly from the flux and quite
irritating. Avoid breathing it by keeping you head to the side of, not above,
your work.
Wash your hands after using solder.
Solder contains lead which is a poisonous metal.
If you are unlucky (or careless!) enough to burn yourself please read the First Aid
section.
Preparing the soldering iron:
Place the soldering iron in its stand and plug in.
The iron will take a few minutes to reach its operating temperature of about
400°C.
Dampen the sponge in the stand.
The best way to do this is to lift it out the stand and hold it under a cold tap
for a moment, then squeeze to remove excess water. It should be damp, not
dripping wet.
Wait a few minutes for the soldering iron to warm up.
You can check if it is ready by trying to melt a little solder on the tip.
Wipe the tip of the iron on the damp sponge.
This will clean the tip.
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Melt a little solder on the tip of the iron.
This is called 'tinning' and it will help the heat to flow from the iron's tip to the joint.
It only needs to be done when you plug in the iron, and occasionally while soldering
if you need to wipe the tip clean on the sponge.
You are now ready to start soldering:
Hold the soldering iron like a pen,
near the base of the handle.
Imagine you are going to write your name!
Remember to never touch the hot element
or tip.
Touch the soldering iron onto the
joint to be made.
Make sure it touches both the
component lead and the track. Hold
the tip there for a few seconds and...
Feed a little solder onto the joint.
It should flow smoothly onto the lead and track to form a volcano shape as
shown in the diagram. Apply the solder to the joint, not the iron.
Remove the solder, then the iron, while keeping the joint still.
Allow the joint a few seconds to cool before you move the circuit board.
Inspect the joint closely.
It should look shiny and have a 'volcano' shape. If not, you will need to
reheat it and feed in a little more solder. This time ensure that both the lead
and track are heated fully before applying solder.
If you are unlucky (or careless!) enough to burn yourself please read the First Aid section.
First Aid for Burns
Most burns from soldering are likely to be minor and treatment is simple:
Immediately cool the affected area under gently running cold water.
Keep the burn in the cold water for at least 5 minutes (15 minutes is
recommended). If ice is readily available this can be helpful too, but do not
delay the initial cooling with cold water.
Do not apply any creams or ointments.
The burn will heal better without them. A dry dressing, such as a clean
handkerchief, may be applied if you wish to protect the area from dirt.
Seek medical attention if the burn covers an area bigger than your
hand.
To reduce the risk of burns:
Always return your soldering iron to its stand immediately after use.
Allow joints and components a minute or so to cool down before you touch
them.
Never touch the element or tip of a soldering iron unless you are certain it is
cold.
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Self-Check #1.4-1A

LO4. APPLY PROPER SOLDERING AND DE-SOLDERING TECHNIQUES

Multiple Choices: Choose the correct letter that best describes the statement.
Write your answers in capital letter on your answer sheet.

1. What will be the immediate action would you do when somebody


burns from soldering.
A. Apply any creams or ointments
B. Seek medical attention
C. Cool the affected area under gently running cold water
D. Wash on warm water

2. To avoid accident when soldering always do this.


A. Wash your hands after using solder
B. Work in a well-ventilated area
C. Dampen the sponge in the stand
D. Always return the soldering iron to its stand when not in use

3. Safety precaution aftersoldering.


A. Wash your hands after using solder
B. Work in a well-ventilated area
C. Dampen the sponge in the stand
D. Always return the soldering iron to its stand when not in use

4. By damping the soldering iron on the sponge you will do the task.
A. Testing the tip
B. Cleaning the tip
C. Aligning the tip
D. Removing the tip

5. A good solder joint is look like a.


A. Volcanic shape
B. Circular shape
C. Square shape
D. Oval shape

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
ANSWER KEY #1.4-1A
Self-Check of #1.4-1A

LO4. APPLY PROPER SOLDERING AND DE-SOLDERING TECHNIQUES

1. C
2. D
3. A
4. B
5. A

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Information Sheet # 1.4-1B

LO4. APPLY PROPER SOLDERING AND DE-SOLDERING TECHNIQUES

Learning Objectives: In an electronics shop scenario, the trainee will be able to


apply proper soldering and de-soldering techniques in assembling and
disassembling consumer electronics products and systems with-in 25 minutes.

Using a heat sink


Some components, such as transistors, can be
damaged by heat when soldering so if you are not an
expert it is wise to use a heat sink clipped to the lead
between the joint and the component body. You can buy a Crocodile clip
special tool, but a standard crocodile clip works just as well and is cheaper.
Soldering Advice for Components
It is very tempting to start soldering components onto
the circuit board straight away, but please take time to
identify all the parts first. You are much less likely to
make a mistake if you do this!
1. Stick all the components onto a sheet of paper
using sticky tape.
2. Identify each component and write its name or
value beside it.
3. Add the code (R1, R2, C1 etc.) if necessary.
Many projects from books and magazines label the
components with codes (R1, R2, C1, D1 etc.) and
you should use the project's parts list to find these
codes if they are given.
4. Resistor values can be found using the resistor color code which is
explained on our Resistors page. You can print out and make your own
Resistor Color Code Calculator to help you.
5. Capacitor values can be difficult to find because there are many types with
different labeling systems! The various systems are explained on our
Capacitors page.
Some components require special care when soldering. Many must be placed
the correct way round and a few are easily damaged by the heat from soldering.
Appropriate warnings are given in the table below, together with other advice
which may be useful when soldering.

For most projects it is best to put the components onto the board in the
order given below:
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Components Pictures Reminders and Warnings
Connect the correct way round
IC Holders by making sure the notch is at the
1
(DIL sockets) correct end.
Do NOT put the ICs (chips) in yet.
No special precautions are needed
2 Resistors
with resistors.
These may be connected either way
Small value
round.
capacitors
3 Take care with polystyrene
(usually less
capacitors because they are easily
than 1µF)
damaged by heat.
Electrolytic
Connect the correct way round.
capacitors
4 They will be marked with a + or -
(1µF and
near one lead.
greater)
Connect the correct way round.
Take care with germanium diodes
5 Diodes
(e.g. OA91) because they are easily
damaged by heat.
Connect the correct way round.
The diagram may be labeled a or+
for anode and k or - for cathode;
6 LEDs yes, it really is k, not c, for cathode!
The cathode is the short lead and
there may be a slight flat on the
body of round LEDs.
Connect the correct way round.
Transistors have 3 'legs' (leads) so
7 Transistors extra care is needed to ensure the
connections are correct.
Easily damaged by heat.
Use single core wire; this is one
Wire Links solid wire which is plastic-coated.
between points If there is no danger of touching
8
on the circuit single core wire other parts you can use tinned
board. copper wire, this has no plastic
coating and looks just like solder

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
but it is stiffer.
Battery clips,
buzzers and
9 Connect the correct way round.
other parts with
their own wires
Wires to parts
off the circuit
board, You should use stranded wire
including which is flexible and plastic-coated.
10 switches, Do not use single core wire because
stranded wire
relays, this will break when it is repeatedly
variable resisto flexed.
rs and
loudspeakers.
Connect the correct way round.
Many ICs are static sensitive.
Leave ICs in their antistatic
packaging until you need them,
and then earth your hands by
touching a metal water pipe or
11 ICs (chips)
window frame before touching the
ICs.
Carefully insert ICs in their
holders: make sure all the pins are
lined up with the socket then push
down firmly with your thumb.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Self-Check #1.4-1B

LO4. APPLY PROPER SOLDERING AND DE-SOLDERING TECHNIQUES

Multiple Choices: Choose the correct letter that best describes the statement.
Write your answers in capital letter on your answer sheet.

1. Used in soldering technique to protect the component by excessive


heat.
A. Solder wick
B. Heat sink
C. Soldering Pump
D. Soldering Stand

2. This is used soldering the integrated circuit component.


A. Solder sucker
B. Tweezers
C. IC holder
D. Terminal pins

3. When soldering polarize component we considered the.


A. Alignment of the component
B. Position of the component
C. Terminal of the component
D. Polarity of the component

4. In soldering a component we are used as heat sink.


A. Crocodile clip
B. Paper clip
C. Fastener
D. Rubber band

5. When soldering small component we considered. EXCEPT?


A. Low temperature
B. Small amount of solder
C. Time
D. High temperature

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
ANSWER KEY #1.4-1B
Self-Check of #1.4-1B

LO4. APPLY PROPER SOLDERING AND DE-SOLDERING TECHNIQUES

1. B
2. C
3. D
4. A
5. D

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Information Sheet # 1.4-1C

LO4. APPLY PROPER SOLDERING AND DE-SOLDERING TECHNIQUES

Learning Objectives: In an electronics shop scenario, the trainee will be able to


apply proper soldering and de-soldering techniques in assembling and
disassembling consumer electronics products and systems with-in 25 minutes.

De-soldering
At some stage you will probably need to de-solder a joint to remove or re-
position a wire or component. There are two ways to remove the solder:
1. With a de-soldering pump (solder sucker)
Set the pump by pushing the
spring-loaded plunger down until
it locks.
Apply both the pump nozzle and
the tip of your soldering iron to
the joint.
Wait a second or two for the
solder to melt.
Then press the button on the
pump to release the plunger and
suck the molten solder into the
tool.
Repeat if necessary to remove as
much solder as possible. Using a de-soldering pump (solder sucker)
The pump will need emptying occasionally by unscrewing the nozzle.
2. with solder remover wick (copper braid)
Apply both the end of the wick and the tip of your
soldering iron to the joint.
As the solder melts most of it will flow onto the
wick, away from the joint.
Remove the wick first, then the soldering iron.
Cut off and discard the end of the wick coated
Solder remover wick
with solder.
After removing most of the solder from the joint(s) you may be able to remove
the wire or component lead straight away (allow a few seconds for it to cool). If the
joint will not come apart easily apply your soldering iron to melt the remaining
traces of solder at the same time as pulling the joint apart, taking care to avoid
burning yourself.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Here's a summary of how to make the perfect solder joint.
1. All parts must be clean and free from dirt and grease.
2. Try to secure the work firmly.
3. "Tin" the iron tip with a small amount of solder. Do this immediately, with
new tips being used for the first time.
4. Clean the tip of the hot soldering iron on a damp sponge.
5. Many people then add a tiny amount of fresh solder to the cleansed tip.
6. Heat all parts of the joint with the iron for under a second or so.
7. Continue heating, and then apply sufficient solder only, to form an adequate
joint.
8. Remove and return the iron safely to its stand.
9. It only takes two or three seconds at most, to solder the average P.C.B. joint.
10. Do not move parts until the solder has cooled.

Troubleshooting Guide
Solder won't "take" - grease or dirt present – de-solder and clean up the
parts. Or, material may not be suitable for soldering with lead/tin solder (eg
aluminums).
Joint is crystalline or grainy-looking - has been moved before being allowed
to cool, or joint was not heated adequately - too small an iron/ too large a
joint.
Solder joint forms a "spike" - probably overheated, burning away the flux.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Self-Check #1.4-1C

LO4. APPLY PROPER SOLDERING AND DE-SOLDERING TECHNIQUES

Multiple Choices: Choose the correct letter that best describes the statement.
Write your answers in capital letter on your answer sheet.

1. This tool is the resting place of soldering iron.


A. Soldering Gun
B. Soldering Iron
C. Soldering Pump
D. Soldering Stand

2. This is used to clean the un-solder lead to copper plate.


A. Solder Lead
B. Solder Pump
C. Solder Wick
D. Soldering Stand

3. This tool is use for joining the two terminals.


A. Screw Driver
B. Solder
C. Solder Wick
D. Soldering Iron

4. This are used for joining, it composed of tin and lead.


A. PCB Holder
B. PCB Rubber
C. Reel of Solder
D. Solder Wick

5. This tool is used to removing solder when soldering is incorrect.


A. De-soldering pump
B. Solder Wick
C. Soldering Iron
D. Soldering Stand

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
ANSWER KEY #1.4-1C
Self-Check of #1.4-1C

LO4. APPLY PROPER SOLDERING AND DE-SOLDERING TECHNIQUES

1. D
2. C
3. D
4. C
5. A

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Learning Outcome #5 Apply wiring and cabling techniques.

CONTENTS:

Conversion of units
Applied mathematics
Problem solving skills
Work safety requirements and economy of materials with durability
Knowledge in 5S application and observation of required timeframe
Proper care and use of tools
Principles of electrical circuits
Identifying and proper handling of electronic components
Identifying and proper handling of digital components
Fundamentals of ESD handling
Fundamentals of cabling and wiring harness
Identifying connectors and terminators

CONDITIONS:

Students/trainees must be provided with the following:


Learning elements and manuals
Working area/bench
PPE

EQUIPMENT TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES

● Working area/bench ● Long-nose pliers


● Sufficient lighting and ● Diagonal cutters
ventilation system ● Standard screwdrivers
●Soldering iron, 30w
●De-soldering iron, 30w
●Screw driver assorted,
●Phillips, slotted
●Wrenches assorted
●Allen wrench/key
●Utility knife/stripper
●Pliers assorted, long
●nose, side cutter
●Test jig

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LEARNING MATERIALS

● Solder lead ● Books and references


●Cleaning brush ● Technical manuals
●lead free solder ● Documentation forms
●rosin core solder ● Report forms
●wire stranded, #22, ● Self-paced learning
●different colors) elements
●silicon grease ● CBLM
●resistors (different values)
●capacitors (different
●values)
●transformer
●Learning materials
●Books and references

METHODOLOGIES:
Lectures
● Demonstration
Research work
Role-playing

ASSESSMENT METHODS:
Return demonstration
Oral and written examinations / Paper and Pen Test
Direct Observation/ Interview
Practical examination

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Learning Experiences

Learning Outcome 5

DETERMINE LEARNER’S TRAINING REQUIREMENTS

Learning Activities Special Instructions


1. Read Information Sheet # 1.5-1
On Communications and Interviewing
Skills
2. Answer Self-Check #2.1-1 Compare answer with Answer Key
3. Read Information Sheet #2.1-1A
4. Answer Self-Check #2.1-1A Compare answer with Answer Key
5. Perform Task Sheet #2.1-1 Evaluate Using Performance criteria
checklist
6. Read Information Sheet #2.1-1B
7. Answer Self-Check #2.1-1B Compare answer with Answer Key

8. Read Information Sheet #2.1-1C


9.Read Information Sheet #2.1-1D
10. Answer Self-Check #2.1-1D Compare answer with Answer Key

11. Read Information Sheet #2.1-1E


12. Answer Self-Check #2.1-1E Compare answer with Answer Key
13. Read Information Sheet #2.1-1E
Evaluate Using Performance criteria
14. Perform Job Sheet #2.1-1 checklist
15. Assignment Sheet #2.2-1

16. Watch Video Clips This video clips will identify the specific
endangerments sites for the trainee to
apply safety and precaution on these
sites.

After doing all the activities of this LO,


you are ready to proceed to the next LO
on discuss the treatment strategy with
the client/patient.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Information Sheet # 1.5-1

LO5. APPLY WIRING AND CABLING TECHNIQUES

Learning Objectives: In an electronics shop scenario, the trainee will be able to


apply proper soldering and de-soldering techniques in assembling and
disassembling consumer electronics products and systems with-in 25 minutes.

Circuit Diagrams

Circuit diagrams show how


electronic components are connected
together. Each component is
represented by a symbol and a few
are shown here, for other symbols
please see the Circuit Symbols
Basic Composition of a Circuit

Basic circuit is composing of Source, Switch,


Path and Load.
Switch
Source – The first part of an electrical circuit is an
electrical energy source. The starting point of energy
that produces electricity; like generators, large power Source
station and small energy produce by cell, battery and Load
others

Path – The second part of an electrical circuit is a very Path


important one: the conductors. This will serve as the
path way of the electron that would be freely to flow.

Load – The electrical load is the third part of an electrical circuit and is basically a
device that uses electricity. For example this computer, your TV, your lights, fans,
heaters and other devices that use electricity are all considered "electrical load"
devices.

Switch –the last part of an electrical circuit is the switch. An electrical switch can
control the electrical current by opening or closing. Opening an electrical switch
causes the energy source to be interrupted until the switch is once again closed.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Circuit diagrams and component
layouts
Circuit diagrams show the connections as
clearly as possible with all wires drawn
neatly as straight lines. The actual layout
of the components is usually quite
different from the circuit diagram and this
can be confusing for the beginner. The
secret is to concentrate on the connections,
not the actual positions of components.

A circuit diagram is useful when testing a


circuit and for understanding how it
works. This is why the instructions for
projects include a circuit diagram as well
as the strip board or printed circuit board
layout which you need to build the circuit.

Drawing circuit diagrams

Drawing circuit diagrams is not difficult but it takes a


little practice to draw neat, clear diagrams. This is a
useful skill for science as well as for electronics. You
will certainly need to draw circuit diagrams if you
design your own circuits.
Follow these tips for best results:
Make sure you use the correct symbol for each
component.
Draw connecting wires as straight lines (use a
ruler).
Put a 'blob' ( ) at each junction between wires.
Label components such as resistors and
capacitors with their values.
The positive (+) supply should be at the top and
the negative (-) supply at the bottom. The negative
supply is usually labeled 0V, zero volts.
If you are drawing the circuit diagram for science
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
please see the section about drawing diagrams the 'electronicsway'.
If the circuit is complex:

Try to arrange the diagram so that signals flow from left to right: inputs and
controls should be on the left, outputs on the right.
You may omit the battery or power supply symbols, but you must include
(and label) the supply lines at the top and
bottom.

Drawing circuit diagrams the 'electronics way'

Circuit diagrams for electronics are drawn with the


positive (+) supply at the top and the negative (-)
supply at the bottom. This can be helpful in
understanding the operation of the circuit because
the voltage decreases as you move down the circuit
diagram.

Circuit diagrams for science are traditionally drawn


with the battery or power supply at the top. This is
not wrong, but there is usually no advantage in
drawing them this way and I think it is less helpful
for understanding the circuit.

Note that the negative supply is usually called 0V (zero volts).

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Information Sheet # 1.5-1A

LO5. APPLY WIRING AND CABLING TECHNIQUES

Learning Objectives: In an electronics shop scenario, the trainee will be able to


apply the techniques in assembling and disassemblingthe different type of power
supply products and systems with-in 25 minutes.

Power Supplies

Types | Dual supplies | Transformer | Rectifier | Smoothing

Types of Power Supply

There are many types of power supply. Most are designed to convert high voltage
AC mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronic circuits and
other devices. A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks, each of
which performs a particular function.

Each of the blocks is described in more detail below:

Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC.


Rectifier - converts AC to DC, but the DC output is varying.
Smoothing - smooth’s the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple.
Load Resistor - to discharge the electric current.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Power supplies made from these blocks are described below with a circuit diagram
and a graph of their output:

Transformer only
Transformer + Rectifier
Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing

Dual Supplies

Some electronic circuits require a power


supply with positive and negative outputs as
well as zero volts (0V). This is called a 'dual
supply' because it is like two ordinary
supplies connected together as shown in the
diagram.

Dual supplies have three outputs, for example a ±9V supply has +9V, 0V and -9V
outputs.
Transformer only

The low voltage AC output is suitable for lamps, heaters and special AC motors. It
is not suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a rectifier and a
smoothing capacitor.

Transformer + Rectifier

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
The varying DC output is suitable for lamps, heaters and standard motors. It is
not suitable for electronic circuits unless they include a smoothing capacitor.

Transformer + Rectifier + Smoothing

The smooth DC output has a small ripple. It is suitable for most electronic
circuits.

Transformer

Transformers convert AC electricity from one voltage to


another with little loss of power. Transformers work
only with AC and this is one of the reasons why mains
electricity is AC.

Step-up transformers increase voltage, step-down Transformer


transformers reduce voltage. Most power supplies use circuit symbol
a step-down transformer to reduce the dangerously
high mains voltage (230V in UK) to a safer low voltage.

The input coil is called the primary and the output


coil is called the secondary. There is no electrical
connection between the two coils; instead they are
linked by an alternating magnetic field created in the
soft-iron core of the transformer. The two lines in the
middle of the circuit symbol represent the core.

Transformers waste very little power so the power out


Transformer
is (almost) equal to the power in. Note that as voltage
is stepped down current is stepped up.

The ratio of the number of turns on each coil, called the turn’s ratio, determines
the ratio of the voltages. A step-down transformer has a large number of turns on
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
its primary (input) coil which is connected to the high voltage mains supply, and a
small number of turns on its secondary (output) coil to give a low output voltage.

Vp Np power out = power in


turns ratio = = and
Vs Ns Vs × Is = Vp × Ip
Vp = primary (input) voltage Vs = secondary (output) voltage
Np = number of turns on primary coil Ns = number of turns on secondary coil
Ip = primary (input) current Is = secondary (output) current

Rectifier

There are several ways of connecting diodes to make a rectifier to convert AC to


DC. The bridge rectifier is the most important and it produces full-wave varying
DC. A full-wave rectifier can also be made from just two diodes if a centre-tap
transformer is used, but this method is rarely used now that diodes are cheaper. A
single diode can be used as a rectifier but it only uses the positive (+) parts of the
AC wave to produce half-wave varying DC.

Bridge rectifier
A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes, but it is also available
in special packages containing the four diodes required. It is called a full-wave
rectifier because it uses the entire AC wave (both positive and negative sections).
1.4V is used up in the bridge rectifier because each diode uses 0.7V when
conducting and there are always two diodes conducting, as shown in the diagram
below. Bridge rectifiers are rated by the maximum current they can pass and the
maximum reverse voltage they can withstand (this must be at least three times the
supply RMS voltage so the rectifier can withstand the peak voltages). Please see the
Diodes page for more details, including pictures of bridge rectifiers.

Bridge rectifier Output: full-wave varying DC


Alternate pairs of diodes conduct, changing (using all the AC wave)
overthe connections so the alternating
directions ofAC are converted to the one
direction of DC.
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Single diode rectifier

A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC
which has gaps when the AC is negative. It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well
to supply electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the
smoothing capacitor does not significantly discharge during the gaps. Please see
the Diodes page for some examples of rectifier diodes.

Output: half-wave varying DC


Single diode rectifier
(using only half the AC wave)

Smoothing
Smoothing is performed by a large value electrolytic capacitor connected across the
DC supply to act as a reservoir, supplying current to the output when the varying
DC voltage from the rectifier is falling. The diagram shows the unsmoothed varying
DC (dotted line) and the smoothed DC (solid line). The capacitor charges quickly
near the peak of the varying DC, and then discharges as it supplies current to the
output.

Note that smoothing significantly increases the average DC voltage to almost the
peak value (1.4 × RMS value). For example 6V RMS AC is rectified to full wave DC
of about 4.6V RMS (1.4V is lost in the bridge rectifier), with smoothing this
increases to almost the peak value giving 1.4 × 4.6 = 6.4V smooth DC.

Smoothing is not perfect due to the capacitor voltage falling a little as it discharges,
giving a small ripple voltage. For many circuits a ripple which is 10% of the
supply voltage is satisfactory and the equation below gives the required value for
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
the smoothing capacitor. A larger capacitor will give less ripple. The capacitor value
must be doubled when smoothing half-wave DC.

5 × Io
Smoothing capacitor for 10% ripple, C =
Vs × f

C = smoothing capacitance in farads (F)


Io = output current from the supply in amps (A)
Vs = supply voltage in volts (V), this is the peak value of the unsmoothed DC
f = frequency of the AC supply in hertz (Hz), 50Hz in the UK

There are many types of power supply. Most are designed to convert high
voltage AC mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronic circuits
and other devices. A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks,
each of which performs a particular function.

Types of a Power Supply

 Half Wave Rectifier Circuit


 Full Wave Rectifier Circuit
 Bridge Type Rectifier Circuit
 Split-Voltage Rectifier Circuit

Half Wave Rectifier Circuit


A single diode can be used as a rectifier but this produces half-wave varying DC
which has gaps when the AC is negative. It is hard to smooth this sufficiently well
to supply electronic circuits unless they require a very small current so the
smoothing capacitor does not significantly discharge during the gaps.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
+ +
AC input ~ DC output

- -
This process is simulating the process of converting AC to DC, although we
would not see this but we can follow by means flow of current, the source come-in
to the AC cord and when we close the circuit or SW1 will be close the current will
continues flow so that the primary coil will produce magnetic flux containing
electron to transfer to another coil or secondary coil, let us simulate the flow of
current at the primary coil the negative side at the top and positive side at the
bottom while at the secondary coil will receive a reverse polarity or the negative at
the bottom and the positive at the top.
Let us used the electron flow it means the negative will flow going to the
positive. At the secondary side the negative or electron will flow directly to negative
terminal of power supply and also passing through the capacitor that was the time
the capacitor is in charging condition and also passing through diode because the
connecting of the diode is in forward bias or the cathode of the diode is connected
to the negative and the anode of the diode is connected to the positive. So that the
negative and positive energy will meet there is continues current flow, so that there
is an output on our terminal both positive and negative terminals.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
- +
AC input ~ DC output

+ -
And this time we will reverse the polarity at the primary side so the negative
at the bottom and the positive at the top then our secondary polarity will change,
now the negative in the top and the positive at the bottom, we will follow the same
procedure, negative to positive flow; this time the negative or electron flow going to
the diode but the connection of the our diode is in a reverse bias or the anode is
connected to the negative and cathode connected positive so the current will be
block by our diode, but still there is an output by means of our capacitor because
we all know the our capacitor having a capability to hold or store electrical charge
so this time through the helps of the resistor load will release or discharge the
electrical charge to the capacitor this is the capacitor output goes out.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Full Wave Rectifier Circuit
 A dual diode can be used as a rectifier; both (+) and (-) AC input will produce
dc output.
 Commonly used center top transformer

+ +
AC input ~ - - DC output

-
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
This type is dual diode and center top transformer will used, the same
procedure electron flow. The circuit contains two diode represent D1 and D2,
capacitor C1 and resistor R1. The current start at the negative side but
unfortunately D2 is in a reverse bias so the current block it means no output but
they would not happen because as our circuit design in the three terminals or
center top the signal start at the center; because if u can trace the line 0V terminal
is directly connected to the negative terminal. The current passing through the
capacitor to charge and going to the D1 because D2 is in reverse bias at the first
attempt of current flow and D1 is in forward bias; there is continues current flow.

-
AC input ~ - - DC output

+ +

This time when reverse the polarity, and follow the same procedure, the first
attempt of current flow will block by D1 and the signal goes out at the center or 0V
terminals again the current directly goes out to the negative terminal and passing
to capacitor and going to the D2 because D1 is in reverse bias and D2 is in forward
bias so this time there a continues current flow.
So this type of power supply both positive and negative input signal are used
and our RC couple or the capacitor (C1) and resistor (R1) they are used also but
not total used all the charge of our capacitor they are only a few electrical charge.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Bridge Type Rectifier Circuit
 A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes, but it is also
available in special packages containing the four diodes required. It is called
a full-wave rectifier because it uses the entire AC wave (both positive and
negative sections). Bridge rectifiers are rated by the maximum current they
can pass and the maximum reverse voltage they can withstand (this must be
at least three times the supply Root Mean Square (RMS) voltage so the
rectifier can withstand the peak voltages).

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
This is the process in a bridge type power supply

Split-Voltage Rectifier Circuit


 A bridge rectifier can be made using four individual diodes, but it is also
available in special packages containing the four diodes required. It is called
a full-wave rectifier because it uses the entire AC wave (both positive and
negative sections).
 Both Positive and Negative DC output and a ground or common.
 Commonly used center top transformer

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Self-Check #1.5-1A

LO5. APPLY WIRING AND CABLING TECHNIQUES

Multiple Choices: Choose the correct letters that best describe the statement.
Write your answers in capital letter on your answer sheet.

1. This device are designed to convert high voltage AC mains electricity to a


suitable low voltage supply for electronic circuits:
A. Wet Cell
B. Battery
C. Dry Cell
D. Power Supply

2. This block of power supply that eliminates the ripple.


A. Load Resistor
B. Transformer
C. Smoothing
D. Rectifier

3. This block can step down the high voltage input going to a low voltage
output.
A. Load Resistor
B. Transformer
C. Smoothing
D. Rectifier

4. This block could help the capacitor to release the electric charge:
A. Load Resistor
B. Transformer
C. Smoothing
D. Rectifier

5. This block is to convert AC signal in to DC signals:


A. Load Resistor
B. Transformer
C. Smoothing
D. Rectifier

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
ANSWER KEY #1.5-1A
Self-Check of #1.5-1A

LO1. ANALYZE AND INTERPRET THE DEFFERENT CONNECTION IN


CIRCUITS

1. D
2. C
3. B
4. A
5. D

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
TASK SHEET 1.5-1A

Title: Unregulated Power Supply Circuits

Performance Objective: The trainee must be able to interpret and


explain the flow of signal or flow of current in the
circuits.

Supplies/Materials : Paper, Pencil and Ball Pen

Equipment : Drawing Materials

Steps/Procedure:

A. Analyze carefully the circuits of bridge type’s power supply.


B. Simulate the signal or current flow in the diagram base on the
electron flow.
C. Draw the simulation and explain it accordance to the current
flow.

Assessment Method:

Demonstration, Evaluate Using Performance criteria checklist

Performance Criteria Checklist


Task Sheet #1.5-1A

CRITERIA YES NO
Did I...
1. Identify the difference types of power supply?
2. Explain the flow of current in power supply?
3. Safety precautions and procedures observed?

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Information Sheet # 1.5-1B

LO5. APPLY WIRING AND CABLING TECHNIQUES

Learning Objectives: In an electronics shop scenario, the trainee will be able to


apply the techniques in assembling and disassembling the different type of power
supply products and systems with-in 25 minutes.

Power Supplies

Types of Power Supply


There are many types of power supply. Most are designed to convert high
voltage AC mains electricity to a suitable low voltage supply for electronic circuits
and other devices. A power supply can by broken down into a series of blocks,
each of which performs a particular function.

Each of the blocks is described in more detail below:

Transformer - steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC.


Rectifier - converts AC to DC, but the DC output is varying.
Smoothing - smooth’s the DC from varying greatly to a small ripple.
Regulator - eliminates ripple by setting DC output to a fixed voltage.

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM of Regulated POWER SUPPLY

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Regulator
Voltage regulator ICs are available with
fixed (typically 5, 12 and 15V) or variable output
voltages. They are also rated by the maximum
Voltage Regulator
current they can pass. Negative voltage regulators are available, mainly for use in
dual supplies. Most regulators include some automatic protection from excessive
current ('overload protection') and overheating ('thermal protection').
Many of the fixed voltage regulators ICs have 3 leads and look like power
transistors, such as the 7805 +5V 1A regulator shown on the right. They include a
hole for attaching a heat sink if necessary.

Zener diode regulator


For low current power supplies a simple voltage
regulator can be made with a resistor and a zener diode
connected in reverse as shown in the diagram. Zener zener diode
diodes are rated by their breakdown voltage Vz and a = anode, k = cathode
maximum power Pz (typically 400mW or 1.3W).
The resistor limits the current (like an LED
resistor). The current through the resistor is constant,
so when there is no output current all the current flows
through the zener diode and its power rating Pz must be
large enough to withstand this.
Choosing a zener diode and resistor:
1. The zener voltage Vz is the output voltage
required
2. The input voltage Vs must be a few volts greater than Vz
(this is to allow for small fluctuations in Vs due to ripple)
3. The maximum current Imax is the output current required plus 10%
4. The zener power Pz is determined by the maximum current: Pz > Vz × Imax
5. The resistor resistance: R = (Vs - Vz) / Imax
6. The resistor power rating: P > (Vs - Vz) × Imax
Example: output voltage required is 5V, output current required is 60mA.
1. Vz = 4.7V (nearest value available)
2. Vs = 8V (it must be a few volts greater than Vz)
3. Imax = 66mA (output current plus 10%)
4. Pz> 4.7V × 66mA = 310mW, choose Pz = 400mW
5. R = (8V - 4.7V) / 66mA = 0.05k = 50 , choose R = 47
6. Resistor power rating P > (8V - 4.7V) × 66mA = 218mW, choose P = 0.5W

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Transistor regulator
 Four most often used series pass fixed and variable voltage regulator
schematics are;
 Transistor regulated supply with positive output.
 Transistor regulated supply with negative output.
 Transistor regulated supply with variable output.
 Transistor regulated supply with positive and negative outputs.

 Transistor regulated supply with positive output.

Note: C1 value from 100uf to 220uf (uf – microfarad)


Zener diode value is base on the voltage output and power rating
R1 value is about 10 to 47 ohms 1 watt.

 Transistor regulated supply with negative output.

 Transistor regulated supply with variable output.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
 Transistor regulated supply with positive and negative outputs.

Note: Power transistors C1061 and A671 have 1 ampere current rating. For larger current
requirements use large power and output transistors with larger heat sink. Ex. 2N3055 for
NPN and MJ2955 for PNP.
Integrated Circuit regulator
 Integrated Circuit regulated supply with positive output.
 Integrated Circuit regulated supply with negative output.
 Integrated Circuit regulated supply with variable output.
 Integrated Circuit regulated supply with positive output.
- IC voltage regulator is preferable to the transistor regulator because of greater
efficiency and few external components.

1 2
15 Volt
+ IC-7815 +
Supply
Unregulated
DC Regulated
V- output 3
output
15 – 18 Volts
- -

Note: 78series are positive output


 Integrated Circuit regulated supply with negative output.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
3 2
- IC-7909 -
V – OUT
Unregulated
-5 Volt
V- IN 2.2uf 1 1uf
Supply
6 – 35 Volts + /50V + /50V
+ +

Note: 79series are negative output


 Integrated Circuit regulated supply with variable output.

3 2
- IC-7905 -

Unregulated 1 270Ω 1uf


V- output 50V V-Out
-6 – 38 Volts 22uf + -5 -30 Volt
50V Supply
1K
+
+ +

Variable voltage regulator IC 7905 (Negative output -5V to -30V 1.5A)

 Integrated Circuit regulated supply with variable output.

2 3
+ IC-350T +

1.2KΩ
1uf 1
+ 50V
Regulated DC
V- output
1.2 – 33 Volts
50K

- -

Variable voltage regulator IC 350T (Positive output 1.2V to -33V 3A)

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
 Integrated Circuit regulated supply with variable output.

3 2
- IC-337T -

10uf 1 10uf
50V
120Ω
50V Regulated DC
V- output
+ + -1.5 – 37 Volts
5K

+ +

Variable voltage regulator IC 337T (Negative output -1.5V to -37V 1.5A)


 Integrated Circuit regulated supply with variable output.

2 3
+ LM317 +
LM 317
0.1 1 1uf
240Ω
50V Regulated DC
V- output
+ + 1.2 – 37 Volts
5K Adjust
Output
- - Input

Variable voltage regulator IC-LM317 (Positive output 1.2V to -37V 1.5A)

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Self-Check #1.5-1B

LO5. APPLY WIRING AND CABLING TECHNIQUES

Multiple Choices: Choose the correct letters that best describe the statement.
Write your answers in capital letter on your answer sheet.

1. This device are designed to convert high voltage AC mains electricity to a


suitable low voltage supply for electronic circuits:
A. Power Supply
B. Battery
C. Dry Cell
D. Wet Cell

2. This block of power supply that could fix the output voltage.
A. Regulator
B. Transformer
C. Smoothing
D. Rectifier

3. This block can change the face of signal from AC to DC.


A. Regulator
B. Transformer
C. Smoothing
D. Rectifier

4. This block could fulfill the gap on a DC signal:


A. Load Resistor
B. Transformer
C. Smoothing
D. Rectifier

5. This block is to steps down high voltage AC mains to low voltage AC:
A. Load Resistor
B. Smoothing
C. Transformer
D. Rectifier

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
ANSWER KEY #1.5-1B
Self-Check of #1.5-1B

LO5. APPLY WIRING AND CABLING TECHNIQUES

1. A
2. A
3. D
4. C
5. C

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
TASK SHEET 1

Title: Regulated Power Supply Circuits

Performance Objective: The trainee must be able to interpret and


explain the flow of signal or flow of current in the
circuits.

Supplies/Materials : Paper, Pencil and Ball Pen and other list of


supplies at the part list below.
Equipment : Breadboard, side cutter; long nose pliers and
Tester
Steps/Procedure:

A. Prepared the materials.


B. Based on the schematic diagram on Figure 1; construct the
circuit on your breadboard.
C. After constructing the circuit, plug-in to the outlet and turn on
the SW1.
D. Then select SW2 to 12V.
E. Measure the voltage output to the terminal.
F. Fill-up the table.
A. Table: Measured DC Voltage.
Output Measured
Terminal Voltages
5V
12V
B. Table: Measured the DC Voltage according to the
position of VR1.Adjust the VR1 as follow;
Terminal Output
(0 to 18V)
VR1
Measured
Voltages
Minimum

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
9 oclock
Middle
3 oclock
Maximum
Assessment Method:

Demonstration, Evaluate Using Performance criteria checklist

Figure 2 Schematic Diagram of a Regulated Power Supply with Fixed 5V, 12V,
and variable 1.2V to 18V

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Part List: Schematic Diagram of a Regulated Power Supply with Fixed 5V,
12V, and variable 1.2V to 18V
(Input 0-220VAC;
Transforme T1 Output 0, 3, 4.5, 6, 9, Resisto R1 (220Ω 1/4W) 1
r 12V 1Amp.) r pc.
D1 - Potentiometer
VR2
Diode D8 Rectifier (1N4001) - 8 pcs. (5kΩ or 10kΩ)
Integrated LM317 Variable Rotary (6 states) -
IC1 SW2
Circuit Output 0 to 31 Volts Switch 1 pc.
IC2 7812 Regulated Output 12 Volts SW1 SPST - 1 pc.
7805 Regulated Plug &
IC3 1 set.
Output 5 Volts Cord
Fuse
(250V, 500mA) -
C1 Electrolytic W/ F1
1 set
Capacitor (2200uf/50V) - 1 pc. Holder
C2,
C5, Ceramic or Mylar (0.1
C7, uf) Jumper wire (# 22) 1
C9 Wire meter.
Stranded wire (#22) 1
C3 Electrolytic (10uf/50V)
meter.
C4 Electrolytic (100uf/50V)
C6 Electrolytic (47uf/16V)
C8 Electrolytic (22uf/10V)

Performance Criteria Checklist


Task Sheet #1

CRITERIA YES NO
Did I...
1. Identify the difference types of power supply?
2. Explain the flow of current in power supply?
3. Safety precautions and procedures observed?

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Information Sheet # 1.5-1C

LO5. APPLY WIRING AND CABLING TECHNIQUES

Learning Objectives: In an electronics shop scenario, the trainee will be able to


apply proper soldering and de-soldering techniques in assembling and
disassembling consumer electronics products and systems with-in 25 minutes.

Breadboard

Uses of Breadboard
A breadboard is used to make up temporary
circuits for testing or to try out an idea. No soldering
is required so it is easy to change connections and
replace components. Parts will not be damaged so they
will be available to re-use afterwards.
Almost all the Electronics Club projects started life on
a breadboard to check that the circuit worked as
intended.
The photograph shows a typical small Small Breadboard
breadboard which is suitable for beginners building
simple circuits with one or two ICs (chips). Larger sizes
are available and you may wish to buy one of these to start with.

Connections on Breadboard
Breadboards have many tiny sockets (called 'holes') arranged on a 0.1" grid.
The leads of most components can be pushed straight into the holes. ICs are
inserted across the central gap with their notch or dot to the left.
Wire links can be made with
single-core plastic-coated wire of
0.6mm diameter (the standard
size). Stranded wire is not suitable
because it will crumple when
pushed into a hole and it may
damage the board if strands break
off.
The diagram shows how
the breadboard holes are
connected:
The top and bottom rows are
linked horizontally all the way
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
across as shown by the red and black lines on the diagram. The power supply is
connected to these rows, + at the top and 0V (zero volts) at the bottom.
I suggest using the upper row of the bottom pair for 0V, then you can use
the lower row for the negative supply with circuits requiring a dual supply (e.g.
+9V, 0V, -9V).
The other holes are linked vertically in blocks of 5 with no link across the
centre as shown by the blue lines on the diagram. Notice how there is separate
blocks of connections to each pin of ICs.
Large Breadboards
On larger breadboards there may be a break halfway along the top and bottom
power supply rows. It is a good idea to link across the gap before you start to build
a circuit, otherwise you may forget and part of your circuit will have no power!
Building a Circuit on Breadboard
Converting a circuit diagram to a breadboard layout is not straightforward
because the arrangement of components on breadboard will look quite different
from the circuit diagram.
When putting parts on breadboard you must concentrate on their
connections, not their positions on the circuit diagram. The IC (chip) is a good
starting point so place it in the centre of the breadboard and work round it pin by
pin, putting in all the connections and
components for each pin in turn.
The best way to explain this is by
example, so the process of building this
555 timer circuit on breadboard is
listed step-by-step below.
The circuit is a monostable which
means it will turn on the LED for about
5 seconds when the 'trigger' button is
pressed. The time period is determined
by R1 and C1 and you may wish to try
changing their values. R1 should be in
the range 1k to 1M .
Time Period, T = 1.1 × R1 × C1
For further information please see Monostable Circuit Diagram
555 monostable.

IC pin numbers
IC pins are numbered anti-clockwise around the IC
starting near the notch or dot. The diagram shows
the numbering for 8-pin and 14-pin ICs, but the
principle is the same for all sizes.
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Components without suitable leads
Some components such as switches and variable
resistors do not have suitable leads of their own so
you must solder some on yourself. Use single-core
plastic-coated wire of 0.6mm diameter (the standard
size). Stranded wire is not suitable because it will crumple when pushed into a
hole and it may damage the board if strands break off.

Building the example circuit


Begin by carefully insert the 555 IC in the centre of the breadboard with its notch
or dot to the left.
Then deal with each pin of the
555:
1. Connect a wire (black) to
0V.
2. Connect the 10k resistor
to +9V.
Connect a push switch to
0V (you will need to
solder leads onto the
switch)
3. Connect the 470 resistor
to an used block of 5
holes, then...
Connect an LED (any
colour) from that block to Monostable Circuit on Breadboard
0V (short lead to 0V).
4. Connect a wire (red) to +9V.
5. Connect the 0.01µF capacitor to 0V.
You will probably find that its leads are too short to connect directly, so put
in a wire link to an unused block of holes and connect to that.
6. Connect the 100µF capacitor to 0V (+ lead to pin 6).
Connect a wire (blue) to pin 7.
7. Connect 47k resistor to +9V.
Check: there should be a wire already connected to pin 6.
8. Connect a wire (red) to +9V.
Finally...
Check all the connections carefully.
Check that parts are the correct way round (LED and 100µF capacitor).
Check that no leads are touching (unless they connect to the same block).

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Connect the breadboard to a 9V supply and press the push switch to test the
circuit.
If your circuit does not work disconnect (or switch off) the power supply and very
carefully re-check every connection against the circuit diagram.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Information Sheet # 1.5-1D

LO5. APPLY WIRING AND CABLING TECHNIQUES

Learning Objectives: In an electronics shop scenario, the trainee will be able to


apply proper soldering and de-soldering techniques in assembling and
disassembling consumer electronics products and systems with-in 25 minutes.

Strip board

Strip board has parallel strips of


copper track on one side. The tracks are
0.1" (2.54mm) apart and there are holes
every 0.1" (2.54mm).
Strip board is used to make up
permanent, soldered circuits. It is ideal
for small circuits with one or two ICs
(chips) but with the large number of holes
it is very easy to connect a component in
the wrong place. For large, complex circuits Strip board circuit (copper tracks side)
it is usually best to use a printed circuit
board (PCB) if you can buy or make one.
Strip board requires no special preparation other than cutting to size. It can
be cut with a junior hacksaw, or simply snap it along the lines of holes by putting
it over the edge of a bench or table and pushing hard, but take care because this
needs a fairly large force and the edges will be rough. You may need to use a large
pair of pliers to nibble away any jagged parts.
Avoid handling strip board that you are not planning to use immediately
because sweat from your hands will corrode the copper tracks and this will make
soldering difficult. If the copper looks dull, or you can clearly see finger marks,
clean the tracks with fine emery paper, a PCB rubber or a dry kitchen scrub before
you start soldering.
Placing components on strip
board
Components are placed
on the non-copper side, and
then the strip board is turned
over to solder the component
leads to the copper tracks.
Strip board layouts are shown

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
from the component side, so the tracks are out of sight under the board. Layouts
are normally shown with the tracks running horizontally across the diagram.
Placing components on strip board requires care. The large number of holes
means it is very easy to make a mistake! For most small circuits the best method is
to very carefully place the IC holder(s) in the correct position and solder in place.
Then you can position all the other components relative to the IC holder(s).
Minor position errors left and right will not usually be a problem because the
component will still be connected to the correct tracks. However, up and down
position errors must be avoided because just one hole too high or too low will
connect the component to the wrong track and therefore the wrong part of the
circuit.
Some people like to label the holes with letters (up/down) and numbers
(across) to give each hole a 'grid reference' but this still requires careful counting of
holes.
Cutting strip board tracks
Most strip board circuits will need to have some tracks cut to
break the connection at that point. This is always necessary under
ICs, except for the rare cases where opposite pins must be
connected. The tracks are cut with a special track cutter tool or a
3mm drill bit.
Places where the tracks must be broken are usually shown
with a cross (X). The cuts are made on the underside (copper side) so
extra care is needed to identify the correct hole. It is best to cut the Track cutter
track after soldering because the solder joints will make it easier to
identify the correct position.
Place the track cutter on the correct hole and twist it to and fro using
moderate force. The aim is to break the copper track, not drill a hole through the
board! Inspect the cut closely to ensure there is no fine thread of copper left across
the break, because even the tiniest piece will conduct.
Planning a strip board layout
Converting a circuit diagram to a strip board layout is not straightforward
because the arrangement of components is quite different. Concentrate on the
connections between components, not their positions on the circuit diagram.
Collect all the parts you will be using in the circuit so you can use a piece of
strip board to work out the minimum space they require. For some components
(such as IC holders) the space required is fixed, but for others you can increase the
space to obtain a better layout. For example most
resistors require at least 3 hole-spacing’s if they
are to lie flat on the board, but they can easily
span across a greater distance.
If necessary resistors can be mounted
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
vertically between adjacent tracks (0.1" spacing) as shown in the diagram. This
arrangement can help to produce a simpler layout but the tracks are more likely to
be damaged if the resistor is knocked. If you are designing a strip board layout for
a serious long-term purpose it is best to mount all resistors horizontally.
Plan the layout with a pencil and paper (or on computer if you have suitable
software) and check your plan very carefully against the circuit diagram BEFORE
you attempt to solder any part of the circuit. The best way to explain the planning
process is by example, so there is a step-by-step example to follow below.
Strip board Planning Sheet
To make planning easier it is best to use
paper marked with a 0.1" grid to match the
spacing of strip board holes. You can use graph
paper or try our Strip board Planning Sheet.
Working 'real size' on a 0.1" grid makes it
easy to allow the correct space for components,
but you will need to draw very neatly. If you prefer
to work at an enlarged scale you can use a piece of
strip board for measuring component sizes in
'number of holes'.
IC pin numbers
IC pins are numbered anti-clockwise around
the IC starting near the notch or dot. The diagram
shows the numbering for 8-pin and 14-pin ICs, but
the principle is the same for all sizes.
Components without suitable leads
Some components such as switches and
variable resistors do not have suitable leads of
their own so you must solder some on yourself.
Use stranded plastic-coated wire; single-core wire
is not suitable unless the circuit is going to be permanently mounted in a box with
no flexing of the wires.

Planning an example strip board layout


When planning a strip board layout you must concentrate on the
connections between components, not their positions on the circuit diagram. The
best way to explain the planning process is by example, so the section below
explains the process step-by-step for a 555 astable circuit which flashes an LED.
The strip board tracks are horizontal in all the diagrams.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
The circuit diagram
The circuit diagram is the starting
point for any strip board layout, even if
you have already built a trial circuit on
breadboard.
The LED flashes at a rate
determined by the resistors R1 and R2
and the capacitor C1. R1 must be at least
1k and both R1 and R2 should not be
more than 1M . To select a value for the
LED resistor R3 please see the LEDs
page.
LED on time: Tm = 0.7 × (R1 + R2) × C1 Astable Circuit Diagram
LED off time:Ts = 0.7 × R2 × C1
T = Tm + Ts = 0.7 × (R1 + 2R2) × C1
Frequency (flashes per second), f = 1/T
Tm and Ts are about equal if R2 is much larger than R1.
For further information please see 555 astable.

Planning the layout


1. Place the IC holder near
the centre of your
planning sheet with pin 1
at the top left (as in the
diagram). You may find it
helpful to number the
pins.
2. Mark breaks in each
track under the IC
holder with a cross (X).
The breaks prevent opposite pins of the IC being connected together. The
track beside each pin of the IC is connected to that pin, the diagram shows
this for pins 3 and 6.
3. Mark the power supply tracks +Vs and 0V, choose tracks which are 2 or 3
spaces above and below the IC holder as shown in the diagram.
4. Now add the wire links. Draw a 'blob' ( ) at each end of a link. The links are
vertical because the strip board tracks make the horizontal connections.
Tinned copper wire (with no insulation) can be used for these links unless
there is a risk of them touching other wires (in which case use single core
insulated wire). Work round the IC pin-by-pin from pin 1.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
o Draw all the direct links to the supply tracks (+Vs and 0V). The
diagram shows pin 1 connected to 0V and pins 4 and 8 connected to
+Vs.
o Draw any links required between pins on the same side of the IC.
There are none in the example, but these links are straightforward to
add.
o Links to pins on the other side of the IC requires more thought. If
the pins happen to be opposite one another you can erase the track
break (X) between them. Otherwise the pins can be linked by
connecting both of them to an unused track above or below the IC.
The diagram shows pins 2 and 6 linked in this way. Another method is
to link them with insulated wire bent around the IC (see the
Flashing LED project for example).

5. Add components
which will be
mounted on the
strip board such as
resistors, capacitors
and diodes. Make
sure you allow for
their size which
determines the
minimum number of holes, and sometimes the maximum as well. This is
usually the most difficult stage of planning a layout so expect to change your
plan several times! Remember to label the components, otherwise it will
become confusing once there are several on the plan.
Connections which do not involve the IC are made using an unused track.
For example resistor R3 and the LED are connected by an unused track
above the IC.
Watch for alternative arrangements using the links you have already
made. For example the LED needs to connect to 0V but it is a long stretch to
the 0V track. It is easier to connect the LED to the same track as pin 1 of the
IC because that track is already connected to 0V by a wire link.
Resistor R2 needs to connect from pin 7 to pin 6 and it could do this directly
by mounting it vertically. However, it has been connected from pin 7 to the
track used to link pins 2 and 6, the extra space this gives allows R2 to lie
horizontally on the board.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
6. Add wires to
components which
will be off the
strip board such as
switches. These
should normally be
on the left and right
at the edges of the
board. Start by adding the battery clip or power supply leads to the +Vs and
0V tracks. Connections for the other off-board components are usually easy
because you do not need to allow for their size, just draw wires to the correct
tracks.
7. Check your plan very carefully by checking every connection shown on the
circuit diagram. A good way to do this is to work round the IC pin-by-pin.
Check all the connections and components connected to pin 1, then move on
to pin 2, and so on.

8. Look for ways to


improve your plan.
For example it may be
possible to eliminate an
unused track by
moving a supply track
nearer to the IC - but
make sure there is still
sufficient space for the
components. It may
also be possible to move links and components closer to the IC horizontally
to make the area of board required a little smaller.
Unused tracks above and below the IC have been eliminated in the example.
This affected two components, resistor R1 and capacitor C1, but both will
still fit in the reduced space. The plan could be compressed a little further by
moving components and links closer to the IC horizontally but this has not
been done.

9. Finally, check your


plan again and make a
neat copy fully labeled
with all the component
references or values.
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Work out the size of strip board required. Notice that an extra hole has been
allowed on the left and right to avoid soldering at the end of a track. Joints
made at the end of a track are likely to break because the small piece of
track beyond the last hole easily breaks away from the board.
It is tempting to rush straight into soldering the circuit, but do check your
plan carefully first. It is much easier to correct errors on the plan than it is
to correct to correct them on the soldered board!

This example plan is just one of the many possible layouts for the circuit. The
Flashing LED project uses the same circuit, but the strip board plan is quite
different. In this case the aim was to have the minimum number of wire links.

The completed strip board layout and the circuit diagram for comparison:

Flashing LED Circuit

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Self-Check #1.5-1D

LO5. APPLY WIRING AND CABLING TECHNIQUES

Multiple Choices: Choose the correct letter that best describes the statement.
Write your answers in capital letter on your answer sheet.

1. This tool is the resting place of soldering iron.


B. Soldering Gun
C. Soldering Iron
D. Soldering Pump
E. Soldering Stand

2. This is used to clean the un-solder lead to copper plate.


A. Solder Lead
B. Solder Pump
C. Solder Wick
D. Soldering Stand

3. This tool is use for joining the two terminals.


A. Screw Driver
B. Solder
C. Solder Wick
D. Soldering Iron

4. This are used for joining, it composed of tin and lead.


A. PCB Holder
B. PCB Rubber
C. Reel of Solder
D. Solder Wick

5. This tool is used to removing solder when soldering is incorrect.


A. De-soldering pump
B. Solder Wick
C. Soldering Iron
D. Soldering Stand

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
ANSWER KEY #1.5-1D
Self-Check of #1.5-1D

LO5. APPLY WIRING AND CABLING TECHNIQUES

1. D
2. C
3. D
4. C
5. A

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Information Sheet # 1.5-1E

LO5. APPLY WIRING AND CABLING TECHNIQUES

Learning Objectives: In an electronics shop scenario, the trainee will be able to


apply proper soldering and de-soldering techniques in assembling and
disassembling consumer electronics products and systems with-in 25 minutes.

Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs)

Printed circuit boards have copper tracks connecting the holes where the
components are placed. They are designed especially for each circuit and make
construction very easy.

Preparation of PCB

1. Prepare the needed materials for etching


• Un-etched pcb
• Pencil eraser
• Ferric Chloride solution
• Plastic Container (etching tank)
• Pencil
• Masking Tape
• Carbon Paper
2. Clean the PCB’s copper (foil side) surface by wiping away any greasy finger
prints & smudges with a eraser and clean rag.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
3. With a pencil eraser, rub the copper (foil side) surface until all oxidation (dark
spots) has been removed. The copper surface should look bright gold after this
process.
Designing a PCB
In PCB designing first let us get the size of the PCB for the actual size, and
then familiarize the components in the circuits.
Schematic diagram of Unregulated and Regulated Power Supply

There are important things in PCB lay outing the terminal pad ( ) this
are serve as the terminal connection of the components the size is 5mm.
connecting path ( ) the path serve as the medium to flow the electron to
the circuit and connecting the different component in the circuits and the size is
3mm. Familiarization of the components; resistor, diode, capacitor are two (2)
terminals ( ) with respect to the actual distance of the terminal of the
components and transistor and other integrated circuits are three (3) terminals (
).
Let as plan first the layout of the PCB, always thing that the layout is in the
copper side of the PCB, arranging or placing the components in the proper place,
by sorting the components, by placing the same components in one place and put
the corresponding pad of each components like in the figure A, and all Integrate
Circuit (IC’s) and Transistor having a metal plate at the back of the components it
is always place it at the edge or side of the PCB.
Connect each terminal pad according to the connection from the schematic
diagram same as in figure B. And always remember that there is no 90° degree on
the line of connecting path, no cross over between two lines and no crossing
between two terminals of the component except to the diode and resistor and all
negative or ground must be connected to each other.
And the finish layout is like in the figure C.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Schematic diagram of Unregulated and Regulated Power Supply

Figure A.

O I
G

I O
G

Figure B.

O I
G

I O
G

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Figure C.

Designing of PCB
4. Cover the whole copper
PCB's copper (foil side) with
masking tape.
5. Rub the surface of the
masking with any smooth
object to remove any air
bubbles trapped between
the tape the PCB and to
ensure that the masking
tape has adhered to the PCB
properly.
6. Mount the carbon paper
between the copy of the PCB
design & the taped PCB side
& secure with masking tape.
7. Carefully trace the PCB
design using a pencil or ball
point pen. Make sure that a
substantial amount of force
is used during the tracing process in order the
carbon paper to mark the copper surface of the PCB.
Or you may draw directly to the masking tape your
layout.
8. Carefully remove both the PCB design and the
carbon paper from the PCB itself.
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
9. Inspect and compare the
carbon paper trace marks
on the PCB's masking tape
to the actual PCB design.
There should be no
difference between the two.
10. With a blade or NT
Cutter, cut and peel off the
masking tape areas without
any carbon trace marks.

11. Again, rub the


remaining masking tape
traces on the PCB to ensure
that all has adhered to the
foil side properly.

12. Inspect the inked traces


and compare it to the actual
PCB design. Again, it
should be exactly the same.

Etching of PCB
13. Place the PCB (copper
side facing up) into a plastic
container.

14. Slowly pour the ferric


chloride into the container
making sure that the PCB’s
copper surface is covered by
the solution.

15. Constantly agitate the


container by rocking or tipping it from side to side. Repeat the process until the
PCB’s exposed (not covered by ink) copper surface has been dissolved.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Note: add rock salt to improve the intensity to dissolve the copper plate of
the PCB

Cleaning of PCB
16. Rinse off the ferric chloride from the surface of the PCB with running water.
This will stop the chemical reaction. (Soup the surface if possible)
17. Dry the copper surface with a clean rag of paper towel.
18. Peel off the masking tape traces from the PCB copper surface. Wipe the copper
(foil side) with contact cleaner, acetone or thinner to remove any gum or adhesive
left by the masking tape.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Drilling of PCB
19. Inspect for visible problems with the copper foil traces. Use an Ohmmeter to
check for continuity or short circuit problems.

20. Drill the appropriate holes for the components that are to be mounted.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Mounting of Components
21. Mount the components properly into their designated places then solder.
Be careful to have the correct polarity of the components.

Soldering of Components
22. Observe the proper techniques of soldering; solder all the components to the
PCB.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
23. Trim the excess leads of each component, cutting nearest to the pcb solder as
possible.

Cleaning and Drilling a PCB ready for Soldering


1. Clean off the protective coating from the
PCB using a PCB rubber or steel wool so
that all the copper tracks are bright and
shiny. The PCB rubber has grit in it to make
it very abrasive.
In fact the coating can be left on and it should
melt away around the joints as you solder,
but in the Electronics Club we have generally
had better results by removing the coating.
2. Drill the holes with a 1mm diameter bit.
This is easiest with a proper electric PCB
drill in a stand, but a hand-held miniature
electric drill can be used if you take care to
avoid twisting and snapping the small drill
bit. Wear safety spectacles.
A hand-drill is not suitable for such small bits unless you are very skilled.
3. A few may holes may need to be larger, for example preset resistors
usually need a 1.5mm diameter hole. It is simplest to re-drill these special
holes afterwards.
4. Check carefully to make sure you find all the holes.
Even with experience it is easy to miss one or two!

WARNING! The small drill bits are fragile. Drill gently but firmly. If you are using a
hand-held drill you must take great care to avoid twisting the drill sideways
because this will snap the drill bit.

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Self-Check #1.5-1E

LO5. APPLY WIRING AND CABLING TECHNIQUES

Multiple Choices: Choose the correct letter that best describes the statement.
Write your answers in capital letter on your answer sheet.

1. This is used to make apermanent circuit.


A. Breadboard
B. Printed Circuit Board
C. Skeletal
D. Strip Board

2. This is used in etching the PCB that dissolves the copper plate.
A. Alcohol
B. Ferric chloride
C. Oil
D. Thinner

3. This is used to cover the copper plate of the PCB and serve as protector.
A. Scoot tape
B. Masking tape
C. Carbon paper
D. All of the above

4. To remove the dark spot on the copper we are used ______________.


A. Eraser
B. Sand paper
C. Thinner
D. None of the above

5. After etching the PCB before drill, you should ____________ first.
A. Check if there is shorted
B. Check the continuity
C. A & B
D. B only

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
ANSWER KEY #1.5-1E
Self-Check of #1.5-1E

LO5. APPLY WIRING AND CABLING TECHNIQUES

1. D
2. C
3. D
4. C
5. A

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Learning Outcome #6 Apply assembling and disassembling techniques.

CONTENTS:

Work Safety requirements and economy of materials with durability


Knowledge in 5S application and observation of required timeframe
Knowledge of proper handling and disposal of chemicals
Proper care and use of tools
Identifying and proper handling of electronic components
Identifying and proper handling of digital components
Fundamentals of ESD handling
Fundamentals of thru-hole assembly
Fundamentals of surface-mount assembly
Work efficiently & systematically

CONDITIONS:

Students/trainees must be provided with the following:


Learning elements and manuals
Working area/bench
PPE

EQUIPMENT TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES

● Working area/bench ● Long-nose pliers


● Sufficient lighting and ● Diagonal cutters
ventilation system ● Standard screwdrivers
●Soldering iron, 30w
●De-soldering iron, 30w
●Screw driver assorted,
●Phillips, slotted
●Wrenches assorted
●Allen wrench/key
●Utility knife/stripper
●Pliers assorted, long
●nose, side cutter
●Test jig

SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LEARNING MATERIALS


Date Developed: Document No.
Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
● Solder lead ● Books and references
●Cleaning brush ● Technical manuals
●lead free solder ● Documentation forms
●rosin core solder ● Report forms
●wire stranded, #22, ● Self-paced learning
●different colors) elements
●silicon grease ● CBLM
●resistors (different values)
●capacitors (different
●values)
●transformer
●Learning materials
●Books and references

METHODOLOGIES:

● Demonstration
Research work
Role-playing

ASSESSMENT METHODS:
Return demonstration
Oral and written examinations / Paper and Pen Test
Direct Observation/ Interview
Practical examination

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
Learning Outcome #7 Perform systematic inspection and applying
specific testing procedure.

CONTENTS:

Hazardous and risk assessment mechanisms


Implementation of safety regulations
Safety systems incorporating,
Work clearance procedures
Isolation procedures
Monitoring/testing procedures
Use of protective equipment and clothing
Work Safety requirements and economy of materials with durability
Knowledge in 5S application and observation of required timeframe
Knowledge of proper handling and disposal of chemicals

CONDITIONS:

Students/trainees must be provided with the following:


Learning elements and manuals
Working area/bench
PPE

EQUIPMENT TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES

● Working area/bench ● Long-nose pliers


● Sufficient lighting and ● Diagonal cutters
ventilation system ● Standard screwdrivers
●Soldering iron, 30w
●De-soldering iron, 30w
●Screw driver assorted,
●Phillips, slotted
●Wrenches assorted
●Allen wrench/key
●Utility knife/stripper
●Pliers assorted, long
●nose, side cutter
●Test jig

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01
SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LEARNING MATERIALS

● Solder lead ● Books and references


●Cleaning brush ● Technical manuals
●lead free solder ● Documentation forms
●rosin core solder ● Report forms
●wire stranded, #22, ● Self-paced learning
●different colors) elements
●silicon grease ● CBLM
●resistors (different values)
●capacitors (different
●values)
●transformer
●Learning materials
●Books and references

METHODOLOGIES:

● Demonstration
Research work
Role-playing

ASSESSMENT METHODS:
Return demonstration
Oral and written examinations / Paper and Pen Test
Direct Observation/ Interview
Practical examination

Date Developed: Document No.


Assembling and JANUARY 2013 Issued by:
Disassembling Consumer Date Revised:
Electronics Product and TESDA PTC- CAINTA Page__ of__
System Developed by:
RONUALDO G. LIRIO Revision # 01

You might also like